JP2020099829A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing damage caused by fraudulence.SOLUTION: A probability variation accessory 700 of a pachinko machine 10 determines the initiation of a probability variation and the termination of the probability variation. The probability variation begins with a ball entry into a probability variation initiation switch 703 as a trigger. The probability variation ends with a ball entry into a probability variation termination switch 707 as a trigger. A ball, which passed through the probability variation initiation switch 703, is held in a ball receiving part 704b of a probability variation rotary body 704, and then guided to a ball ejection part 706 connected to the probability variation termination switch 707 at a constant speed. The period of the probability variation is longest if the probability variation begins and ends with no jackpot being hit during the probability variation. The pachinko machine 10 terminates the probability variation when a predetermined period elapses after the probability variation is initiated by the probability variation accessory 700. The pachinko machine executes fraudulence processing if it is determined that the probability variation period is longer than a preset value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variable effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the starting entrance (starting entrance) (start winning), and for example, three in the effective display area horizontally or vertically, or in a 3×3 square. A total of 9 symbols and the like are displayed, and the symbols and the like displayed based on a predetermined game condition are scrolled, and when the scroll is stopped, a stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a big hit when you are there.

In addition, during scrolling of symbols and the like, an entertaining effect (for example, an effect by reach display) that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit) is sometimes performed, which is advantageous. It is also devised to give the player a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, in the production by the reach display, not only is it suggested that the jackpot will be a big hit, but whether or not the probability of being a big jackpot becomes a high probability (high probability state) after the jackpot due to the stop pattern when the scroll is stopped. There is also a gaming machine that produces a performance that makes you expect.

Regarding the high-probability state (probability variation), there is also a gaming machine in which the high-probability state is maintained after the high-probability state is started until the next jackpot is determined (so-called loop-type probability variation machine). In this loop type probability variation machine, since the next big hit is guaranteed in the high probability state, the game in the high probability state can be a monotonous work until the next big hit. In the high probability state, if the variation effect is repeated for a long period of time and the next big hit is not achieved, the player will repeat the monotonous work, and there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable.

On the other hand, from the start of the high-probability state, the high-probability state is maintained until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are finished, and after the jackpot, the high-probability state is maintained again until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are finished There is also a machine (so-called special time machine (ST machine)).

In this ST machine, the longest period from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability variation longest period”) is until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are completed. .. As a result, the ST machine is not guaranteed the next big hit in the high-probability state, so the player wants to continue the high-probability state executed after the big hit by making another big hit during this high-probability state. It is possible to suppress the discomfort given to the player due to the monotonous work of the high probability game.

Further, the ST machine gives a high probability state of the "probability variation longest period" again by making a big hit until the predetermined number of variation effects which are the "probability variation longest period" are executed. In other words, whether or not the jackpot can be repeated in a short period of time, which is the "maximum probability variation period," is an advantage of the ST machine that increases the player's interest in the game.

JP, 2008-272159, A

In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by setting a finite probability variation period, but with such a configuration, there is an illegal act that attempts to set the probability variation period for an unreasonably long period. There was a problem that it was done.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing damage due to fraud.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a display means for displaying a win/fail judgment means for performing a judgment based on the satisfaction of a judgment condition, and identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means. And a dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means A privilege game executing means for executing a game, and a state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being hit by the hit/miss determining means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a setting condition determining unit that determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the special state is set, and the setting condition determining unit that determines the setting condition. State switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the fact that the special state is established, and period determination for determining the period set in the special state based on the setting of the special state. And an abnormality processing unit that determines that an abnormal condition is satisfied when the period determination unit determines that the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period has elapsed and executes a predetermined abnormality process. ..

According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in which a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball and a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detecting means at a first position. Means, moving means for moving the game ball held by the holding means from the first position to the second position in a state of being held by the holding means, and after being moved to the second position by the moving means , A second detecting means for detecting the moved game ball, and the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the judgment is executed by the hit/miss judgment means based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The normal state is set based on the fact that the setting condition is determined by the setting condition determining means. Based on the setting of the special state, the period determining means determines the period set in the special state. When the period determining means determines that the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal condition is satisfied, and the predetermined abnormal process is executed by the abnormal process means.

This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the gaming shop. Therefore, there is an effect that damage due to fraud can be reduced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, since the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormality processing, the special state is changed to the normal state. By forcibly switching, it is possible to suppress the problem that the special state continues unlawfully.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means.

The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied.

As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram of the definite odd-effect object arranged on the game board of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen and effective line setting of the third symbol display device, and (b) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device when the double reach is established. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows various data stored in a ROM in the main control device. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters of the main control apparatus, various reserved ball storage areas, and various reserved ball execution areas. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of a big hit random number table, (b) is a figure which showed an example of a big hit classification table typically, (c) is a big hit variation pattern table FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example, FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 8E is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically. It is the figure which showed typically the operation of the probability variation thing object arrange|positioned at the game board of a pachinko machine, (a) is a schematic diagram immediately after a probability variation start, (b) is a schematic diagram during a probability variation Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram just before the end of the probability change. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle from the probability variation start and the variation of the probability variation object arrange|positioned at the game board of a pachinko machine, (a) is a schematic diagram when it does not hit big during the probability variation. Yes, (b) is a schematic diagram in the case of a big hit during the probability change, (c) is a schematic diagram when two balls enter the probability change object, (d) is during the probability change It is a schematic diagram at the time of the probability variation rotary body of a probability variation thing thing stopping. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a probability variation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change completion|finish schedule process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a probability variation ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation period progress processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle from the probability variation|varieties object and the time from the probability variation start which were arrange|positioned at the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, (a) is fluctuation production during a probability variation. Is a schematic diagram when there is no interruption, and (b) is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main control unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a ROM in the main control unit in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed various stored data typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits in 3rd Embodiment, (b) was shown typically the example of the variation pattern table for deviation in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the elapsed time from the probability change start and the total value of "probability change period progress score" in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation period progress process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change possibility judgment start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation determination completion process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change possibility judging processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a ROM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed various stored data typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the deviation pattern tables AE for deviation in 5th Embodiment, (b) shows typically an example of the switching selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which was, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the small hitting random number table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
<Pachinko machine 10>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 31. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in association with the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start start winning) described later. Various productions such as variation productions and reach productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, the "sea stage" with the motif of the sea of shallow water, the "palace stage" with the motif of the undersea palace, the "deep sea stage" with the motif of the deep sea are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like affixed to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off. It should be noted that while the operation handle 51 is being rotated clockwise by the player, balls are continuously fired at predetermined time intervals (for example, one ball is fired every 0.6 seconds).

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80. , The definite odd object 700 (see FIG. 4) and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are provided on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ab, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37Aa. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as a light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are for displaying in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

All of the plurality of LEDs 37Ab, 37Ba are in the probability change (during high-probability game state) that the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state in which the lottery probability of jackpot is set to a higher probability than in the normal time, or the lottery probability of the jackpot is usually It is a low probability of time, but the lottery probability of jackpot is low probability, and the lottery probability of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to a higher probability than normal time. The probability is set to a low probability in the normal state (in the normal probability game state) is indicated by the lighting state, whether it is fluctuating (in the dynamic display) is indicated by the lighting state, The stopped symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot, or a detached symbol by the lighting state, or the number of reserved balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Aa and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

As will be described later in detail, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when a game ball enters the electric tulip 702 of the probability variation object 700 and the probability variation generation switch 703 (see FIG. 4) detects the game ball. .. The entry into the electric tulip 702 is restricted unless it is determined that a high-probability state is given, that is, the execution of the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "4R probability variation jackpot" is determined. ing. Therefore, since the case where the probability change occurs is determined controllably, it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance is significantly increased.

Further, when the execution of “15R probability variation big hit” or “4R probability variation big hit” is determined, a probability variation start schedule flag 203m (see FIG. 7A) described later is turned on. When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects a game ball, the probability variation is provided on condition that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on. Therefore, even if a game ball is illegally inserted into the electric tulip 702, it is possible to suppress a problem that a positive change occurs.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot in which a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 is given to the player after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds. is there. The “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot in which the player is given a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 after the jackpot with the maximum round number of four rounds. Furthermore, when execution of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "4R probability variation jackpot" is determined, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON, a game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability variation generation switch 703 is operated. Probability variation is set based on the detection of the sphere.

On the other hand, in the "15R regular jackpot", after the jackpot of 15 rounds, the game ball can enter the electric tulip 702, although the number of rounds is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). The probability that the probability change start schedule 203m is not set to ON.

In addition, "probability change (high-probability game state)" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the lottery that is performed when there is a ball in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is increased. In other words, in other words, it is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state (big hit). Although the details will be described later, during the probability variation period (high probability game state period) in this embodiment, the probability variation generation switch 703 of the probability variation object 700 detects the game ball, and then the probability variation end switch 707 detects the game ball. Until.

On the other hand, the "low-probability game state" refers to a state when the probability is not changing and the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. Further, the "low-probability game state" includes a time saving state (time saving medium) and a normal state. “Low probability game state” means that the jackpot probability remains the low probability at the normal time, only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The state. On the other hand, the normal state of the "low probability state" is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time reduction (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

Although details will be described later, during the probability change or shortening of time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the variation time of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time, and is associated with the second entrance 640. The time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to hit the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not limited to that during the probability change or the shortening of the time, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed. May be changed. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times of operations may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not changed, and the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of three symbols, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are triggered by passage of a sphere. A second symbol display device 83, which is composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols, is provided. The number of passages of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the second symbol holding lamp 84 that lights and displays the number of reserved balls is below the third symbol display device 81. 4 are arranged symmetrically for the maximum number of holdings. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first symbol display device 37A, A decorative display corresponding to the display of 37B is performed. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured by using, for example, a reel instead of the display device of the third symbol.

In this way, by displaying the third symbol that is dynamically displayed according to the display of the first symbol, even if the first symbol is a period in which the dynamic display must be continued, the third symbol is not displayed. It is possible to display and display characters and the like, reduce the size of the display, or temporarily stop the display. Further, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, by stopping and displaying the third symbol with a symbol showing the same lottery result as the first symbol, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the first symbol in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, the third symbol is displayed as a symbol showing a lottery result different from the information of the lottery result of the first symbol (for example, if it is a probability variation jackpot, a symbol showing a normal jackpot). In addition, by configuring to notify that the probability is a big hit during the big hit game, it is possible to make the player expect a transition to the positive change state even during the big hit game.

<Structure of Probably Altered Object 700>
Here, with reference to FIG. 4, a configuration of the definite odd-effect object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the definite alternation object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. The definite transformation object 700 includes a through switch 701, an electric tulip 702, a blocking unit 702b, and a definite transformation body 704.

The through switch 701 is a switch that triggers whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the through switch 701, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened when the probability variation start schedule 203m (see FIG. 7) is turned on (FIG. 7). 16 S203).

The method of opening the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and a lottery for deciding whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 based on the ball entering the through switch 701 may be performed. Good. For example, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the through switch 701, and when the value is 7, for example, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on or off. Regardless of whether or not the electric tulip 702 may be opened. With such a configuration, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be transited to the probability variation without winning the probability variation jackpot, so that the range of playability can be expanded.

In addition, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened for a certain period of time, based on the determination that “15R probability variation jackpot” or “4R probability variation jackpot” is provided without providing the through switch 701. May be. In this case, after the first symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is started, a predetermined period during the jackpot game, or a predetermined period after the jackpot game is finished, and so on. Conceivable.

The electric tulip 702 includes an electric accessory 702a, a probability change generation switch 703, a route 703a, and a route outlet 703b. The electric accessory 702a has a pair of blade members arranged facing each other with a width that allows one game ball to pass therethrough. The blade member is normally held in a vertically standing state. The blocking portion 702b is arranged at the opening position where the game ball formed by the upright blade member can enter, and prevents (prohibits) the game ball from entering the electric tulip 702. Then, when the game ball enters the through switch 701 with the probability variation start schedule flag 203m turned on, the blade members rotate about 45 degrees in a direction in which the tips of the blades are separated from each other, and the electric tulip 702 is played. The sphere is changed to a possible state.

The game ball that has entered the electric tulip 702 flows down the path 703b formed in the electric tulip 702, and is detected by the probability change generation switch 703 provided at the end of the path 703b. The probability change generation switch 703 is a magnetic field detection sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball, and detects passage of the game ball by changing the magnetic field as the game ball passes.

When the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects a game ball and the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (probability variation). That is, the probability change generation switch 703 is a switch that triggers the setting of the high-probability game state.

The electric accessory 702a is always set in a standing state (a state in which the electric tulip is closed) except that the electric accessory 702a is opened as the ball enters the through switch 701. When the electric accessory 702a is rotated (the electric tulip 702 is opened), the game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change switch 703 detects the game ball. Then, the electric accessory 702a is turned upright (the electric tulip 702 is closed) (see S205 in FIG. 16).

Further, the method of closing the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and it may be configured to close the electric tulip 702 after continuing the opening for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the case of opening, closing and opening may be repeated a predetermined number of times for each predetermined period.

The probability change generation switch 703 is a switch that detects the entry of a ball. When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 sets (generates) the probability variation (see S206 in FIG. 16).

A cylindrical path 703a and a path outlet 703b are provided in the vertical direction of the probability variation generation switch 703, and connect the electric tulip 702 and the probability variation accessory case 705. The route 703a is made of a transparent material, and the sphere inside the route 703a can be visually recognized.

The probability variation rotating body 704 includes a probability variation rotating body motor 704a, a ball receiving portion 704b, a probability variation component case 705, a ball discharging portion 706, a probability variation ending switch 707, a path 707a, and a path outlet 707b.

The probability variable rotating body motor 704 is supported by the center of the ball receiving portion 704b and rotates the ball receiving portion. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the ball receiving portion 704b is provided with a concave portion in which a game ball can enter one ball in a part of a cylindrical outer shape. Normally, the ball receiving portion 704b is arranged in a state in which the concave portion is oriented vertically upward by the probability varying rotor motor 704 (a state in which the game ball discharged from the route outlet 707b can be received by the concave portion). When a game ball enters the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b, the probability varying rotor motor 704 rotates the ball receiving portion 704b, and when the recess moves to the position of the ball discharging portion 706, the game entering the recess is played. The ball is configured to flow into the path 707a from the ball discharge unit 706.

A probability change end switch 707 is arranged in the middle of the route 707a, and the game ball can be detected. The game ball detected by the probability variation end switch 707 further flows down the route 707a, and then discharged from the route outlet 707b.

Here, the probability variable rotating body motor 704a will be described in more detail. The probability variable rotating body motor 704a is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver. The stepping motor is controlled by outputting a predetermined command capable of designating at least a target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), a rotation direction, and a rotation speed from the MPU 201 to the motor driver. The motor driver determines that the target angle designated by the MPU 201 is more than one step of the stepping motor (for example, one rotation of 1000 pulses corresponds to one step of 0.36 degrees) with respect to the current angle of the stepping motor. Then, the stepping motor is rotated by outputting a predetermined number of pulses in accordance with the designated rotation direction and rotation speed. Further, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a (stepping motor) from the motor driver. Since the maximum clock frequency of the motor driver is equal to or higher than every 2 milliseconds (=500 Hz) which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing of the MPU 201 (for example, 5 MHz), it is 2 mm which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing of the MPU 201. It is possible to control the stepping motor by outputting a predetermined command to the motor driver every second.

When the probability varying rotor motor 704a is operated by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 22), the sphere received in the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b is connected to the probability varying end switch 707 that triggers the probability variation ending. The ball is discharged to the sphere discharging unit 706.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise (the same angle each time) by “angle AX” at intervals of 2 milliseconds (see FIG. 22 ). That is, the ball retained in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b is moved to the ball discharging portion 706 by rotating the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed by the positive variable rotating body motor 704a of the positive variable rotating body 704. Then, the game balls discharged from the ball discharging unit 706 are detected by the probability change end switch 707, and the lottery probability is set from high probability to low probability. That is, the probability variation period is set by the time (period) in which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates. The “angle AX” will be described later.

In the following, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b faces vertically upward (a state in which the concave portion is located below the path outlet 703b) is referred to as a state in which the probability varying rotating body 704 is at the "angle A1". Further, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap each other is described as a state in which the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2”. Further, the angle formed by the probability varying rotor 704 in the clockwise direction from the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2” is referred to as “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”. In this embodiment, the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotator 704” is 300 degrees.

The probability varying accessory case 705 is a cylindrical case body that surrounds the probability varying rotating body 704 and allows the probability varying rotating body 704 to be visually recognized. Since the probability altering substance case 705 is made of a transparent material, the game ball received in the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the cylindrical side surface of the definite odd object case 705 is not provided with an opening other than a passage through which the game ball from the route exit 703b through which the game ball entering the electric tulip 702 flows down, is excluded from the route exit 703b. Thus, it is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b. The probability variation object case 705 is configured such that, when a game ball enters the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b, the ball receiving portion 704b can rotate with the game ball entering the recess. In addition, the inner side wall surface is arranged at a distance that prevents the game ball from coming out of the recess from the recess. Accordingly, even if the ball receiving portion 704b is rotated to the position where the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b faces vertically downward, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball comes out of the concave portion to the outside.

The ball discharging unit 706 is a discharge port for discharging the ball received in the concave portion of the ball receiving unit 704b to the outside of the certain probability modification object 700. The ball discharging portion 706 is a hole provided in the game board 13 and is connected to a path 707a provided with a probability variation end switch 707. Since the lower portion of the ball that is being stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b is inclined toward the ball discharging portion 706, when the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b becomes The ball is discharged from the ball discharging unit 706.

The probability change end switch 707 is set to the end of the probability change based on the detection of the ball entering by the probability change end switch 707 (see S404 in FIG. 19). A cylindrical path 707a is provided in the vertical direction of the probability variation end switch 707, and connects the ball discharging portion 706 and the path outlet 707b. The ball that has passed through the route exit 707b is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10.

The probability variation accessory 700 of the pachinko machine 10 is an accessory for setting the start and end of the probability variation. The probability change start is set upon the arrival of the ball in the probability change occurrence switch 703, and the end of the probability change is set upon the occurrence of the ball to the probability change end switch 707. The sphere that has passed the probability variation generation switch 703 is retained in the concave portion of the sphere receiving portion 704b, guided to the sphere discharging portion 706 connected to the probability variation ending switch 707 at a constant speed, and then passes through the probability variation ending switch 707. .. As the longest period in which the probability variation is set, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the game ball and the start of the probability variation is set, the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch 707 and the end of the probability variation is set. Therefore, it is a period until the probability change ends without a big hit in the probability change period. The longest period in which this probability change is set is referred to as the “maximum probability change period”. Although the details will be described later, the “probability variation longest period” is about 361 seconds in the present embodiment when only one sphere enters the probability variation role object 700.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation is set, the probability variation remaining time can be determined by the probability variation role object 700, so that the player is made aware of the probability variation period remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the effective line setting. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when so-called double reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display region Dm that variably displays the third symbol over almost the entire area of the screen. Further, in the lower center of the main display area Dm, the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (holding balls) is reserved. A reserved display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm includes 10 types of main symbols including 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, It is composed of one type of sub-pattern (in the present embodiment, a picture of a shell) formed smaller than the main pattern. These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub-symbols between each main symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when detecting a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, a big hit lottery is carried out, and together with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display In the device 81, the variation effect (dynamic effect) of the third symbol is executed. The variation effect (dynamic effect) is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol are cyclically scrolled (lateral scroll) from right to left (direction of arrow X) for each symbol row. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in a descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are arranged so as to appear in an ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in each of the symbol columns (Z1 to Z3) in three stages of left, middle, and right. .. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In addition, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, five lines including a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a rightward rising line L4, and a leftward rising line L5 are set as valid lines.

In the pachinko machine 10, at the time of each game, when the variation effect of scrolling horizontally is stopped, if any combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, jackpot. The jackpot video is displayed as.

That is, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display (fluctuation effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the fluctuation effect ends. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after it hits. When it is possible to throw a ball into the probability variation generation switch 703 (see Fig. 4) after the jackpot is over (it is easier to enter the ball than in the normal case) (in the case of a probability variation jackpot), the main number corresponding to an odd number A variation effect in which the symbols (corresponding to the “probability variation pattern”) are arranged is performed.

In the case of the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m that allows the ball to enter the probability variation bonus object 700 is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23), so that the game ball passes through the through switch 701, and thus the electric tulip 702. Is opened, and the game ball can enter the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a variation effect in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are arranged is performed. In the case of a normal big hit, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not turned on (maintained off). That is, the electric tulip 702 is not set to the open state even when the game ball passes through the through switch 701, and the game ball cannot enter the electric tulip.

The stop of the variation effect is performed in the order of the upper symbol sequence Z1→the lower symbol sequence Z3→the middle symbol sequence Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. If so, a screen notifying that effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as “reach established”, and a sound notifying reach is provided on the pachinko machine 10 by the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5). ). Here, "reach" represents a state in which, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, a big hit may occur due to the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 5(b), at the stage where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left/middle of each symbol row Z1, Z3 -The arrangement of the 3rd symbol on the right three stages may be the opposite arrangement. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, main symbols (dugons) of “7”, sub symbols (shellfish), and main symbols of “6” (shark) are arranged in order from the left. In the lower symbol row Z1, the main symbol (shark), the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (Dugon) of "7" are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. And, the arrangement of the third symbols is reversed.

In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 becomes the main symbol (shark) of "6", the main symbol of "6" on the activated line L4 ( (Shark), that is, since the regular symbols, which are the main symbols corresponding to the even symbols, are aligned, it is usually a big hit, and after the big hit, it shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Dugon) of "7", it is the main symbol (Dugon) of "7" on the activated line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probability variation symbols are aligned, a probability variation jackpot is obtained, and after the jackpot is over, the probability variation generation switch 703 (see FIG. 4) of the probability variation winning object 700 is easily inserted into the ball. That is, the state shown in FIG. 5(b) may be a big hit on the two activated lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, both a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. It is in a possible state, that is, in a “double reach” state in which two reaches are established.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, double reach can be established in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, it becomes a mere single reach (reach where the possibility of being a big hit only on one activated line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed) In comparison, the player can be expected to be more likely to win the jackpot. Further, it is possible to make the player have more complicated emotions such as whether it is a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot and the player loses. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The hold display area Db is an area for displaying the number of hold balls, which is the number of balls (hold balls) that have not been changed, among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display 81 (first symbol display 37A, 37B), The number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to 4 times for the entrance into the first entrance 64, and up to 4 for the entrance into the second entrance 640. The total value of the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also in the reserved display area Db.

In the hold display area Db, one hold ball number pattern (● symbol of FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b)) is displayed for each hold ball number, and the hold number is held according to the display number of the hold ball number pattern. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one holding sphere number design is displayed in the holding display area Db, it indicates that the number of holding spheres is one, and when eight holding sphere count designs are displayed, the number of holding spheres Indicates 8 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the reserved display area Db, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Similarly, in the case of entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 are not limited to the same number of times, but are different. It may be set to the number of times. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 may be set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 may be set to two.

In addition, instead of displaying the number of holding balls in the holding display area Db, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into one or a plurality of areas is the number of holding balls. You may make it display in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 for a predetermined time. The variable display is made to alternately light up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, the winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is displayed. It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and the shortening of time.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortened time, the second entrance hole may be increased during the probability change or the shortened time by other methods such as increasing the hit probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When it is in a state where the ball easily enters 640, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and of the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the left side of the game board can pass through. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol. The hold lamp 84 is also illuminated.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the first symbol display device. You may make it perform using a part of 3 symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to 4 times, and is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a second ball entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 are shown. Although configured the same, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different, For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. You may.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state of easily entering the second entrance 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and the shortening of the time period as compared with the normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during normal time during the probability change and the shortening of time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as will be described later in detail, the probability of a big hit depending on whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. It is the same whether or not there is a high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is that when the ball hits the second entrance port 640, the ball hits the first entrance port 64. Set higher than if. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, the jackpot is stopped so that the jackpot pattern 1 While turning on the LED 37Ab of the symbol display device 37A, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

A second variable winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entry slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, a jackpot stop pattern 1 The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 650a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are, specifically, a horizontally elongated rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis to the front side. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided when a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is provided in the game area, and the LED 37Ab, LED37Ba corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are lit. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning openings 65a, 650a while the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened for a predetermined time. You may make it the game state opened for a predetermined number of times as a special game state.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU 201, a major hit of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 includes a special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, and a special figure 2. Reserved sphere number counter 203e, public figure reserved sphere number counter 203f, public figure reserved sphere storage area 203i, public figure reserved sphere execution area 203j, special figure classification flag 203k, probability changing flag 203l, probability changing start scheduled flag 203m, probability transforming object It has at least a ball entry counter 203n, a probability variation period memory 203o, a probability variation period measurement counter 203p, and a probability variation ending schedule flag 203q.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and an outlier variation pattern table 202d.

Further, in the main controller 110, the above-described jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 of the pachinko machine 10. In order to execute main processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) that stores various counters.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202, and various holding ball storages provided in the RAM 203. Areas 203a, 203b, 203i and various holding ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the main controller 110 Used in MPU201.

As each counter, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation pattern selection are used. Variation type counter CS1, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, a second random number counter C4 used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second hit A second initial value random number counter CINI2 used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4 is set. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, as will be described later in detail, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in any of the reserved special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 hold second provided in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is stored in any of the first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number to be a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. The first random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when the ball is won (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the big hit random number table 202a (big hit random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a big hit.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. This jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types, one for a low probability state (state that is not in probability variation) and a high probability state (state during probability variation) that has a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers included in each of the jackpots is set differently. By changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random number value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300 (=3/900).

On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448. , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" is associated with the "high probability state" of the "gaming state" and is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is 1/30 (=30/900).

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state” are duplicate values. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not happen. If a value that is a big hit random number value exists regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the big hit may be illegally assigned. As in the present embodiment, the value of the random number to be a big hit is predicted by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state). Since it can be made difficult, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the second ball entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 2 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in () is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number, it is a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuating effect or the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, “stop type”). Is called) when it comes off. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a big hit, it is a variation effect. The fluctuation pattern and stop type are those at the time of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds, it is possible to enter a ball into the electric tulip 702 that triggers the transition to the high probability state, “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum round. "15R normal jackpot", which is a short-time state for 100 fluctuations in the low-probability state after a 15-round jackpot, and an electric tulip that triggers a transition to a high-probability state after a maximum round number of 4 rounds. There is a "4R probability variation jackpot" that makes it easier to throw a ball into 702.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a big hit, and the second hit The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a big hit, The following is defined as a jackpot type table for the "first entrance". That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big jackpot is awarded along with a winning in the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is a 15R probability variable jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), it becomes a 15R normal jackpot, and with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), it becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the second entrance port 640 is a big hit, "for the second entrance port" The following is defined as a jackpot classification table of. That is, the value "0-24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R certainty variation jackpot, and the value "25-49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, in the case of a jackpot due to the winning of the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is a probability 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), the 15R regular jackpot and the 1/4 (=25/100) probability, the 4R probability variation jackpot.

In this way, the probability of being a 15R certainty variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the second entrance port 640 when the ball enters the first entrance port 64. It is set higher than if it were a ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 depending on the open/close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, but the ball can always enter.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stops including "rear out of front/rear" that stops when the reach is reached, and "reach other than out of front/rear" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete detachment" in which reach does not occur ( A production pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time and the value of the first random number counter C1 together with the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of deviation. It

Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values for which stop types are selected. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it becomes difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, a table having a narrow range of random values 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “Completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out of front/back" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out of front/back" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining a fluctuation pattern, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), returns to 0. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) the first ball entrance 64, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in FIG. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in FIG.

The MPU 201 uses a variation type counter CS1, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C) and a deviation variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9D to 9E) stored in the ROM 202, so-called normal reach. Change patterns such as super reach, special reach, etc. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The mode of variation is determined.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the fluctuation pattern tables, a big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d used at the time of disengagement. Here, as the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for deviation, which is selected when the game state is a normal low probability state excluding the time saving, The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 selected for is set.

Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in () is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is output from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

Further, one reserved area in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth area) If the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in) is not a big hit random number (that is, if it is a random number that is out of range), the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding time saving and shortening. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, when the gaming state is in the time saving or the probability variation, the variation pattern is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of a big hit include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, a variation pattern (variation time period) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. ) Is selected.

Here, various types of normal reach are variation patterns in which the variation time is as short as 30 seconds, and variation patterns in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a short reach. Various types of super reach are variation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than various types of normal reach, and a first pattern (or a third pattern) after a relatively long reach (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach). ) Is a variation pattern. The special reach type is a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, which is longer than that of the various types of super reach, and the reach that is performed for the longest time (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the normal reach is the super reach) It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach etc.).

It should be noted that "various reach" means that there are many things with different effects even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, or a certain character is displayed. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as one in which a notice effect before the start of variation is added, and one in which an effect that makes a big hit by re-variation is added.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c represents a variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 to 198 for various types of special reach.

By selecting various super reach and special reach types that have long fluctuation times as fluctuation patterns, it is possible to greatly expand the expectation that the player will be a jackpot while the fluctuation production by various super reach and special reach is being performed. You can

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation patterns and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are made to correspond to each other regardless of the game state (during normal operation, time saving, during probability change), but for each game state, The correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be different.

Further, although the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, It is also possible to determine how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted to stop (for example, the front and rear deviated by one symbol) or the like by another variation type counter.

Next, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As illustrated in FIG. 9D, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment, and is exclusively for complete detachment, and the front/rear detachment reach and the front/rear detachment. Other than the common reach that is referred to when a reach is determined and the group (group) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached. To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number that is a big hit, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 stores In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (normal) change pattern table 202d1.

There is a short deviation that does not reach even after a short period (7 seconds) of fluctuation, and a long deviation that does not reach reach but has a longer fluctuation time (10 seconds) than the short deviation. The correlation with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, in common to reach, normal reach types that reach are established but have a variation time of 30 seconds, super reach types that have a variation time of 60 seconds longer than the normal reach types, and variation time of 90 seconds more than the super reach types. And various special reach types are long. Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 149 for various normal reach types, 150 to 197 for various super reach types, and 198 for various special reach types.

FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9E, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, like the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. , It is referred to when the front and rear reach and the reach other than the front and back are determined, and there are various types of normal reach, super reach and special reach. , And the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of range, the same holding area when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is stored in the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 exclusively for complete deviation is 0-190 for short deviation and 191-198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach, 191 to 197 for various types of super reach, and 198 for various types of special reach.

Since the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is in a time saving state or during a probability change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning a prize at the second ball entrance 640. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there are too many gaps during time saving or sudden change, it will take time until the start of the next fluctuation display, giving the player a waiting state, which may cause player discomfort. There is a nature. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state of probability change, it is configured so that the short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started early, so that the game is played. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from extremely decreasing.

Here, the relationship between the jackpot reliability of the variation pattern and the variation time will be described. The probability that the reach variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c in FIG. 9C is 51/198 for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and various types of super reach (60 seconds). ) Is 129/198, and the special reach (90 seconds) is 19/198. On the other hand, the probability that the reach variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 of FIG. 9E is 191/198 for various normal reach types (30 seconds), Reach types (60 seconds) are 7/198, and special reach types (90 seconds) are 1/198. The ratio of jackpot to off-jacket is 51/191 (=0.267) for normal reach (30 seconds), 129/7 (=18.43) for super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90). Seconds) is 19/1 (=19). This represents the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot reliability. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the greater the variation time, the higher the reliability of the big hit. As a result, the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him/herself, and thus, even if the variation effect period is long, it is possible to make the variation effect with high reliability of the jackpot interesting.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability variation period is from the time the game ball is detected by the probability change start switch 703 until a certain time elapses until the game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707. Since the period is set, it is more advantageous for the player to select a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time because the chance of being drawn with a high probability is increased. In the present embodiment, the variation time is set short for the variation pattern having a low expectation of jackpot, and the variation time is set long for the variation pattern having a low expectation of jackpot, so that the player has a long variation time. By selecting the variation pattern, even if the probability variation period is exhausted a lot, it is possible to suppress the problem of significantly lowering the motivation for the game by performing the game with a degree of expectation for a big hit.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (the presence or absence of a notice display may be selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is configured to be divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but there are a plurality of holding balls even when the game state is normal. In the case of (for example, if there are a maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that the selection may be performed by referring to the out-of-progress (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the variation pattern table for each deviation shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the short deviation and the long deviation are simply regarded as the deviation, and when the deviation is selected, other tables are referred to. Alternatively, the short deviation and the long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, each table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outlying fluctuation pattern table in the probability variation period is constant regardless of the remaining probability variation period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, a relatively short variation pattern is used. Is set in advance, and a variation pattern table with a relatively long variation time is easily selected (for example, a probability that super-reach is selected is high) when a variation pattern table is set for less than a predetermined period. The pattern table may be configured to be easily set.

Furthermore, in the hit determination of the first symbol, in addition to the deviation, the big hit, the small hit is set, and the small hit is elected, and the table for selecting the change pattern from the plurality of change pattern tables is selected by lottery. It may be configured to do so. In this case, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, by changing and setting the selected ratio of the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, even during the probability variation period, a period (variation time Set a period during which a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation pattern is easily selected is selected) and a period in which a player is disadvantageous (a period during which a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected is selected) It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is a counter used for a random lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and for example, increments one by one in the range of 0 to 250. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time point. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. It is acquired and stored in any of the universal figure holding first to fourth areas of the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i provided in the RAM 203.

In the second hit random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that are hits in the normal game state, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-153”, it is determined that the game state is normal when the game state is normal, and the second symbol display device 83 has a stop symbol (the first symbol). (2 symbol), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values to be a hit when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability change is 250, and the range is "1-250". That is, when the value of the obtained second per random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the game state is during the time saving or the probability change, and the second symbol display device 83 is stopped. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than that in the normal state.

In this way, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during the probability change and during the shortening of time than in the normal case. Further, as described above, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that during the normal time, so that the symbol "○" is likely to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the time reduction is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of being a big hit depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is low even in a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the 2nd entrance 640, the 1st entrance It is set higher than when a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and entering the second ball entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

By the way, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 reserved ball storage is made up of four reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas) in which respective counter values are stored for the ball entering the first entrance 63. An area 203a is provided. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) similarly to the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. ..

Each of the holding areas provided in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in the first random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the fluctuation pattern selection counter, respectively. It has a storage area 203a3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. Although not shown, any of the holding areas provided in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has a first random number counter C1 like the respective reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. A storage area for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is provided.

In the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in synchronization with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. The respective values of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the counters in the special figure 1 first reserved area The value is stored. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first area, the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved second area. Store.

When there are two reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first and second areas, the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area. Stores the value of. When there are three reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first to third areas, the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved fourth area. Stores the value of. As a result, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the starting winnings are displayed in the order of the starting winnings to the first ball entrance 64. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 1 reserved third area, and the special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, which is acquired from the counter buffer, is stopped in synchronization with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640. The respective values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. Which of the reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b in which the value of each counter is to be stored is determined by the reserved area stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined in the same manner as in the case of the special sphere 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. As a result, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the starting winnings in the order of the starting winnings to the second ball entrance 640 are set to the special figure 2 reserved first area and the special figure 2 reserved second. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area.

In addition, when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas, when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected, the value of each counter at that time Is discarded without being held. Similarly, when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 reservation first to fourth areas, when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected, the counter of each counter at that time is detected. The value is discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the values of the respective counters can be held up to a maximum of four starting winnings in each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure reservation ball execution area 203c. At the start timing of the variation effect, if the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is held, the first random number counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first random number counter storage area 203c1 and the first hit type provided in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

If there is no hold in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b but there is a hold in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a The respective stored values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. Then, the values of the respective counters stored in the first random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. Based on, the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b regardless of whether or not the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a holds it. Value is moved to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the fluctuating effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined. Is done. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the start winning in the second ball entrance 640 is prioritized over the starting winning in the first ball entrance 64 in the jackpot lottery, and the variable effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. Is configured.

In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reserved sphere first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, After being moved to the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, the values of the respective counters stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area are then vacant. 2 is shifted to the holding first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special map 1 reserved third area or the special map 2 reserved third area is shifted to the special map 1 reserved second area or the special map 2 reserved second area where the special counter 1 is reserved. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the special figure 1 reserved third area or special figure 2 reserved third area.

As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the values of the respective counters held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second ball entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is held. One area of the storage area 203b is opened. Further, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first ball entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage is performed. One area 203a is opened.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift each piece of data in the holding area (second to fourth) to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data in each holding area. Data may be shifted only in the holding area in which (values of various counters) are stored (held). For example, the number of variation effects (the number of reserved balls) reserved in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area If the data is stored only in and, after the data in the special figure 1 reserved first area is shifted to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, the data in the special figure 1 reserved second area is transferred to the special figure 1 reserved area. The shift process may be completed by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift processing is not performed for the holding area (in the above example, the special figure 1 holding third to fourth areas) in which data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

The RAM 203 also includes a general map including four reservation areas (universal figure reservation first to fourth areas) in which respective counter values are stored for the passage of a ball in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A reserved ball storage area 203i is provided. Each holding area is a second per random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. It has 203i1.

A second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i in synchronization with the passage timing of the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, if there is no reservation in the universal figure holding sphere storing area 203i and all of the universal figure holding first to fourth areas are empty areas, the second random number counter C2 per second in the universal figure holding area The value of is stored. If there is only one reservation in the universal figure reservation sphere storage area 203a and the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure reservation first area, the second per page random number is stored in the universal figure reservation second area. The value of the counter C4 is stored. If there are two reservations in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure holding first and second areas, the number is stored in the third figure holding area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored. If there are three reservations in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure holding first to third areas, the number is stored in the fourth figure holding fourth area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored.

As a result, the values of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere in the order in which passage of the sphere is detected by the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 are set to the universal figure holding number. It can be stored in one area, a public figure reservation second area, a public figure reservation third area, and a public figure reservation fourth area. When the value of the second per random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-fourth public area reservation areas, if passage of a sphere is detected in the first or second through gate 67,670, The value of the second random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i, it is stored in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i. Each value of the second winning random number counter C4 is moved to the second winning random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the second hit random number counter storage area 203j1 of the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j, the winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

Incidentally, when the value of the second random number counter C4 in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i is moved to the public figure holding sphere execution area 203j, it is thereafter stored in the public figure holding second area. Also, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant general-universal-world reservation first area. Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the third figure holding third area is shifted to the empty second figure holding area, and the second random number counter C4 stored in the second figure holding fourth area is stored. It will be shifted to the universal map reservation third area where there is no value.

As a result, when the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second random number counter C4 suspended in the universal symbol retaining sphere storage area 203i, only one symbol is retained normally. 1 area of the universal figure holding ball storage area 203i is opened.

In the pachinko machine 10, when performing data shift processing between the respective holding areas (general drawing holding first to fourth areas) of the public figure holding ball storage area 203i, regardless of whether there is data in each holding area. Instead, each data in the holding area (general-drawing holding second to fourth areas) is configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters are The data may be shifted only for the reserved area in which () is stored (held). For example, the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the universal figure holding first area and the universal figure holding second area. , If the data is stored, after shifting the data of the public figure reservation first area to the public figure reservation ball execution area 203j, the data of the public figure reservation second area is shifted to the public figure reservation first area The shift process may be ended. As a result, since the data shift processing is not performed for the holding area (in the above example, the third-fourth holding areas for the universal figure in the above example) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts should be reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are selected according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as display setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 will be continued. The special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e are the first ball entrances detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) which is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or the number of balls to the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the number of balls to hold the variation effect (variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. This is a counter that counts (the number of times of standby) up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed.

The universal figure holding sphere counter 203f causes the sphere to pass through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on that, up to four times. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S1113 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize is detected and the number of balls to be held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the universal figure holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is executed.

The ordinary figure holding ball number counter 203f is configured to be able to hold the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) up to four times at maximum. Further, the second symbol holding lamps 84 (see FIG. 2) corresponding to the number of holding balls indicated by the universal figure holding ball number counter 203f are turned on. As a result, the player is informed of the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the second symbol.

The special figure classification flag 203k, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), which is a special symbol, is to be executed along with the start winning of the first entrance 64, or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether or not the game is executed in accordance with the start winning in 640. When the special figure classification flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed in association with the start winning of the first entrance 64, When the flag 203k is turned on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed along with the start winning in the second ball entrance 640.

This special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF or ON at the initial stage of setting the start of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, and the start to the second ball entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired in association with the winning are held in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b Is shifted to the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure classification flag 203k is set to ON (see FIG. 21).

Further, when the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0, while the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d is If the values of the various counters that are greater than 0 and are acquired in association with the starting winning into the first ball entrance 64 are held in the special map 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of the various counters stored in the special figure 1 reservation first area are shifted to the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF (see FIG. 21).

In the MPU 201, when the jackpot is determined by the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), the jackpot type table (see FIG. 9(b)) used for determining the jackpot type is specially defined. Based on the diagram type flag 203k, either the "first entrance" or the "second entrance" is set. Specifically, when the special figure classification flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed along with the starting winning prize for the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the "first entrance" is set. On the other hand, when the special figure classification flag 203k is turned on, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is to be executed along with the start winning to the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for the “second entrance” is set.

As described above, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot due to the winning in the first entrance 64 is a probability of 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), it becomes a 15R normal jackpot, and with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), it becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot due to the winning in the second entrance 640 is a probability of 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), which is 1/4 (=25/100). There is a 15R normal jackpot with a probability, and a 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100). In other words, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit is that when the ball enters the second entrance port 640, the ball enters the first entrance port 64. Set higher than if.

As described above, the second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 changes according to the open/close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready to enter.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

The probability changing flag 203l is a flag indicating whether the game state is a high probability state (during probability changing) or a low probability state (normal, medium or short). When the probability-during-change flag 203l is on, it indicates a high-probability state (during probability-change), and when the probability-during-change flag 203l is off, it indicates a low-probability state (normal, medium-time saving).

The probability change flag 203l is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned on when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts probability variation (transition to "high probability state") (see FIG. 17). The probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned off when a sphere enters the probability variation end switch 707 and the probability variation ends (transition to "low probability state") (see FIG. 19).

The probability change flag 203l is for the "high probability state" as the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)) used for jackpot determination in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201. Used to determine which to use for the "low probability state". In the jackpot lottery process, when the probability changing flag 203l is on, the "high probability state" is used, so the jackpot probability is 1/30. When the probability variation flag 203l is off, the low probability state is used, and the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, if the probability variation in progress flag 203l is on when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery process, the number of winnings per round of the jackpot game is determined according to the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p described later (see FIG. 23). ).

The probability variation start schedule flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is scheduled to start probability variation. When the MPU 201 determines that a ball has entered the through switch 701 (see FIG. 4) of the probability-changed object 700, the electric tulip 702 is set to open when the probability-change start schedule 203m is on.

The probability change start schedule flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). If the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit mentioned above or 4R probability variation big hit) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (refer to S901 of FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on. When the ball enters the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened by turning on the probability variation start schedule flag 203m (see FIG. 16). A ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703, and when the probability change is started, the probability change start flag 203m is turned off (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the probability variation start flag 203m is set to OFF when detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703, so that a plurality of game balls enter the electric lilip 702 and the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is switched to a plurality of game balls. Even if it passes, it is possible to suppress the problem that the process in which the probability change is set is executed each time.

When the gaming state is the "low probability state", the gaming state remains the "low probability state" even if the probability variation start schedule 203m is turned on. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through switch 701 and the game ball does not enter while the electric tulip 702 is open, the game ball passes through the through switch 701 again, so that the electric The opening of tulips is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect that the probability variation game is not given to the player because the electric tulip 702 was not allowed to enter the ball at the first opening even though the probability variation jackpot was won, and the player is early in the game. You can suppress getting tired of.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, the configuration is kept on until the probability variation starts. However, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, a predetermined time (for example, If the probability change does not start after 10 minutes), the MPU 201 may turn off the probability change start schedule flag 203m. In such a configuration, the player is notified of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, and the player can identify whether the probability variation game is in progress by passing through the through switch 701. It becomes possible to further improve the player's motivation for the game.

The probability-changed object entering ball counter 203n is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the inside of the probability-changeable object 700 (between the probability-change occurrence switch 703 and the probability-change end switch 707). The probability altering object entrance ball counter 203n is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0 to 255.

This probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 0 as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a ball, the MPU 201 increments the probability variation object entrance counter 203n by 1 (see FIG. 17). When the probability variation end switch 707 detects a ball entry, the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 (see FIG. 18). Even if the definite odds object incoming ball counter 203n is decremented by 1, even if the definite odds object incoming ball counter 203n is 1 or more (even if one ball is ejected from the definite odds object 700, the balls are still inside the definite odds object 700). If there is), the probability change is continuously set. On the other hand, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entry, and the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 to 0, which ends the probability variation (see FIG. 19).

In the present embodiment, the probability variation is continued until the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n becomes 0. In other words, the “probability variation longest period” can be determined according to the number of balls entering the probability variation role object 700. Further, in the present embodiment, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be about 361 seconds for each ball entered in the probability variation role object 700. It should be noted that a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. It is configured so that it can be prevented.

As a result, since the “probability change longest period” becomes longer depending on the number of game balls that have entered the electric tulip 702, the player allows more game balls to enter when the electric tulip 702 is opened. Let's shoot a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to consume more game balls and play the game. Further, it is possible to make the electric tulip 702 interested in how many game balls enter, and it is possible to entertain the player in addition to the jackpot.

The probability variation period memory 203o is a memory that sets a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the "angle A1" to the state of "angle A2". The probability variation period memory 203o is used by the MPU 201 to compare the value with a probability variation period measurement counter 203p described later, and determine whether or not the “probability variation longest period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22). ..

In the probability variation period memory 203o, 0 is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Further, when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts a probability variation (transition to “high probability state”), the probability variation period memory 203o stores the probability variation rotor 704 from the state of “angle A1”. A value corresponding to the period during which the probability varying rotator 704 rotates until the state of “angle A2” is set (see FIG. 17). With respect to this set value, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing, so the probability variation period memory 203o corresponds to 360 seconds in the present embodiment. (=360 seconds/(execution interval (2 milliseconds) of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15)) is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the probability variation, the sphere retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Because it is rotated “angle AX” clockwise.

Here, the “angle AX” can be calculated by ““the angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”/(value of the probability varying period memory 203o)”. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” is 0.00166... (=300/180,000) degrees. In other words, the probability variation period memory 203o is used to calculate the “angle AX” that rotates the probability variation rotating body 704 in the clockwise direction at every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts the probability variation (transition to the “high probability state”), the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is changed to “the maximum probability variation period”. Can be set. The time obtained by adding 1 second to the number of seconds corresponding to the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is the "estimation variation maximum period".

The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is a counter that stores an elapsed period from the start of the probability variation. The probability variation period counter 203p is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0 to 65535. The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is used to compare the value with the probability variation period memory 203o and determine whether or not the “maximum probability variation period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22).

The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts probability variation (transition to “high probability state”) (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added under a predetermined condition every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). Further, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects a ball entering and the probability variation object incoming ball counter 203n is decremented by 1, if the probability variation object incoming ball counter 203n is 1 or more (the probability variation object 700 is The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 in order to continue the probability variation when one ball is still discharged inside the probability variation auditors object 700) (see FIG. 18). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p can determine whether or not the "maximum probability variation period" exceeds the scheduled period.

The probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation is scheduled to end. When the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is on, it indicates that the probability variation is scheduled to end, and when the probability variation termination scheduled flag 203q is off, it indicates that the probability variation is not scheduled to end.

The probability variation end schedule flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Further, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere and the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 to 0, the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned on (see FIG. 18). .. Then, when the probability variation ends, the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned off (see FIG. 19).

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a ball and the MPU 201 subtracts 1 from the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n to 0, if the variation effect is changing, the probability variation is immediately changed. It is configured to end the probabilistic change when the change effect is stopped, instead of ending it. That is, the probability variation end schedule flag 203q allows the probability variation to end when the variation effect is stopped, rather than immediately ending the probability variation if the variation effect is changing.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 7A, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as a counter and I/O are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 26) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side around the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 connects various types to these via an input/output port 205. Send commands and control signals.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with a through switch 701, a probability variation generation switch 703, a probability variation rotor motor 704a, and a probability variation end switch 707 of the probability variation object 700 (see FIG. 4).

The MPU 201 determines whether or not each of the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering via the input/output port 205. These switches output an ON signal to the MPU 201 when the ball entering is detected, and output an OFF signal to the MPU 201 when the ball entering is not detected. The MPU 201 detects the entry of a ball in a switch reading process (see FIG. 16) described later.

The MPU 201 can control the target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), the rotation direction, and the rotation speed of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a via the input/output port 205. Further, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is reached. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

With reference to FIG. 10, the operation of the certainty modification object 700 controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. 10: is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement of the certainty altering thing 700 arrange|positioned at the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG.10(a) is a schematic diagram immediately after the probability variation start (at the time of probability variation start). 10(b) is a schematic diagram during the probability change (during the probability change period), and FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram immediately before the end of the probability change.

As shown in FIG. 10A, immediately after the jackpot game is over, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 causes the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotating body 704 to be below the route 703a of the probability variation generation switch 703 (below the route 703b). It has been stopped to be in position. Here, the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1 (see FIG. 11A)”. The gaming state after the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 is first set to the "low probability state". Here, if the executed jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON (see S907 in FIG. 23). After the jackpot game, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, referred to as "right hitting"), so that the ball enters the through switch 701. Then, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, the electric tulip 702 is opened by the MPU 201.

Next, when a sphere enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the arrival of the sphere, the MPU 201 closes the electric tulip 702, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At this time, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is transited to the "high probability state". The sphere detected by the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 and flows down the path outlet 703b. At this time, since the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is in the state of “angle A1” and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is located below the path outlet 703b, the ball receiving portion 704b is accurately changed. The ball detected by the generation switch 703 stays (that is, the ball stays at the position B in FIG. 10A). For a predetermined time (1 second) after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the sphere receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is maintained in a state of being stopped at the "angle A1" (see S803 in FIG. 22). ).

Next, when a predetermined time (1 second) elapses after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the rotation angle is specified to the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704, and the sphere of the probability variation rotor 704 is designated. The receiving portion starts to rotate in the clockwise direction around the probability variable rotating body motor 704a. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation period advancing processing (see S702 in FIG. 22), the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing. The “angle AX” (which is the same angle each time) is rotated (see S805 in FIG. 22). That is, the sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated by the probability varying rotating body motor 704a of the probability varying rotating body 704 in a clockwise direction to move to the ball discharging portion 706 at a constant speed.

FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram when a predetermined time (for example, 130 seconds) elapses after the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotating body 704 starts rotating clockwise during the probability variation. The sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is moving while the ball receiving portion 704b rotates at a constant speed by the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. (See B in FIG. 10B). This is because the MPU 201 rotates the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotator 704 clockwise (the same angle each time) “angle AX” at every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” rotates the 315 degrees in 360,000 ms because the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates about 315 degrees in 360 seconds and rotates to a position overlapping the ball discharging portion 706. Therefore, it is approximately 0.00175 degrees from 315/180,000 in 2 ms.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram just before the end of the probability change. From FIG. 10B, after a further predetermined time has elapsed, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are in a state of overlapping (the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotating body 704 is “angle A2”). State). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. Since the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 704b is inclined toward the ball discharging portion 706, when the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. To be done. This sphere flows down the path 707a below the sphere discharge unit 706, and is detected by the probability change end switch 707. The sphere B in FIG. 10(c) is the moment when it is discharged from the ball receiving portion 704b from the ball discharging portion 706. When the probability change end switch 707 detects the probability change end process (see FIG. 19), the probability change ends.

In the normal state in which the gaming state is the “low probability state” in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 more easily than the second ball entrance 640. As a route in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance 64, the game is performed by "left hitting" in which the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

When a big hit occurs, the variable winning device 65 arranged in the lower center of the game area and the variable winning device 650 arranged on the right side of the game area are changed so that the game balls can be entered. Digest the jackpot game with "right hitting" to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80, which is a route that allows the game ball to enter both the variable winning device 650. To do.

After the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the "low probability state" during the time saving. If the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the electric tulip 702. This is because the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on when the probability variation big hit occurs (see FIG. 23). In this state, when the game ball is inserted into the electric tulip 702, the game state shifts to the “high probability state” (during probability change) based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703.

The sphere that has passed through the probability variation generation switch 703 is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, and is guided at a constant speed to the sphere discharging portion 706 that is guided to the probability variation end switch 707. The probability variation period is the longest period after the probability variation starts until the probability variation ends without a big hit in the probability variation (in the present embodiment, only one game ball enters the electric tulip 702). 361 seconds when a ball is thrown). During this period, the probability variation period (time) does not change regardless of the number of times the variation effect is executed. When the ball enters the probability change end switch 707, the game state shifts to the time saving of the “low probability state”. During the time saving, the second entrance 640 is easier to enter than the first entrance 64, so the player plays "right hit" until the time is over.

As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) described later, the sphere retained in the receiving portion 704b rotates the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation end switch 707 passes the game ball. Is detected, and the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation effect period is set to be longer as the variation effect having a high jackpot reliability is high (for example, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The variable effect period for the outlier is 7 seconds, while the variable effect period for the special reach is 90 seconds). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, during the probability change, if a variation pattern having a high reliability of a big hit and a long variation effect period (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) is executed among the variation patterns described with reference to FIG. 9, There is a demerit for the player that many of the limited probability variation periods pass without a new lottery being executed due to the variable effect period. However, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern having a long variation effect period is set to have a high jackpot reliability (a probability of being selected when the lottery result is a jackpot rather than being out of the jackpot). Can have a high expectation for a big hit, and can play a game without worrying about a long variation production period. Therefore, the excitement of the player playing the game can be increased, and the player can be prevented from getting tired early.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the variation pattern in which the variation effect period that is executed is long is incorrect, the probability variation period is unnecessarily long as in the configuration in which the probability variation period is determined by the number of times the variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

In addition, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, more chances for jackpot lottery are left, and thus more chances for lottery in a high probability state can be given to the player.

In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. Therefore, the player can predict the time until the end of the probability variation period by recognizing the remaining probability variation period in an analog manner, and select the variation pattern of the short variation time so that more lottery opportunities can be obtained. It is possible to play a game with the expectation that a jackpot is obtained. Therefore, the player can improve the interest in the game.

With reference to FIGS. 11(a) to 11(d), the operation of the probability altering object 700 will be described. FIGS. 11A to 11D show the relationship between the angle of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 of the probability varying object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram when a big hit is not made during the probability change, FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram when a big hit is made during the probability change, and FIG. 11C is a probability change target object. FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram in the case where two balls have entered, and FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram in the case where the probability-changing rotating body of the probability-changing compound object stops during the probability change.

First, with reference to FIG. 11A, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the big hit does not occur during the probability variation will be described. At ta0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At ta0, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

The ta1 o'clock is 1 second after ta0 o'clock, and is the time when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (FIG. 10(a)). reference)).

The ta2 o'clock is a time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the ta1 o'clock, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is driven by the probability varying rotor motor 704a for a predetermined time (this embodiment). Then, every one second) is rotating at a constant speed by a predetermined angle. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B).

At ta3 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from ta2 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the time (ta1 to ta3) from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other is 360. Seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at a constant speed together with the ball receiving portion 704b. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Because it is rotated clockwise by “angle AX”.

Ta4 o'clock is almost the same as ta3 o'clock, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At ta4, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After ta4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by ta5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after ta4 o'clock, The ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the "angle A1" state. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, at ta4, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second".

During the period during the probability change (the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00), the lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used. The “probability variation longest period”, which is the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00, is about 361 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation in the case of a big hit during the probability variation will be described. Time tb0 is the same as time ta0 in FIG. The time tb1 is the same as the time ta1 in FIG. The time from tb1 to tb2 is the same as the time from ta1 to ta2 in FIG.

At tb2, the sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is being rotated together with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed by the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B). FIG. 11B shows a state in which the variation effect, which is a big hit at tb2, is stopped. When the variation effect which is a big hit stops, thereafter, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A2” (S720 in FIG. 21), and 0.5 from tb2. By tb3 when the second elapses, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. At tb2, the current angle “angle A3” of the probability varying rotor motor 704a is acquired from (the motor driver of) the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. For example, when the probability variable rotating body 704 forms a clockwise angle of 200 degrees from the “angle A3” state to the “angle A2” state, at tb2, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor of the probability varying rotor 704 to rotate. The MPU 201 controls the probability varying rotor 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at “speed of 400 degrees per second clockwise” to the motor driver 704a. To do.

The time tb4 is almost the same as the time tb3, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At this time, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). After tb4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of "angle A1", and by tb5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after tb4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 becomes "angle". The state becomes “A1”. The control of the variable probability rotating body 704 by the MPU 201 from tb4 to tb5 is the same as from ta4 to ta5 in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the two balls enter the probability varying object 700 will be described. At time tc0, the ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first game ball. The electric tulip 702 is closed at tc0, but before the closing, another ball (second ball) has entered the electric tulip 702. At tc0, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A1” state. At this time, the probability change is started by the probability change start process (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added to the probability-changeable object entrance ball counter 203n that stores the number of balls that have entered inside the probability-changeable object 700 (between the probability change generation switch 703 and the probability change end switch 707) (see FIG. 17). (See S301).

The time tc1 is the time when one second has elapsed from the time tc0, and is the time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)). Since another ball (the second ball) has entered the electric tulip 702, from tc0 to tc1, the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, and the probability change occurs. One is added to the accessory entrance ball counter 203n (see S301 in FIG. 17). At the time of tc1, the value of the probability altering substance entrance ball counter 203n is 2.

At tc2, 360 seconds have elapsed from tc1, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the period from tc1 o'clock to tc2 o'clock, the first sphere is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and rotates at a constant speed around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. There is. On the other hand, the second ball is a path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, and is stopped by a portion other than the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 (a boundary portion between the ball receiving portion 704b and the path 703a).

At tc3 o'clock, it is almost the same as tc2 o'clock, and the first ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is switched by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be detected. After tc3 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S504 in FIG. 18), and by tc4 o'clock 0.5 seconds after tc3 o'clock, The probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”. Note that at tc3, the value of the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entry into the probability variation end switch 707 (see S501 of FIG. 18), so the value of the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is 1. Is.

Here, in the present embodiment, even when the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball, the gaming state shifts from the high-probability state to the low-probability state if the value of the probability-changed object entering ball counter 203n is not 0. However, the high probability state (probability change) is maintained. Therefore, when two or more game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the high probability state can be maintained until all the entered game balls are detected by the probability change end switch 707.

At tc4, the second ball stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

At tc5 o'clock, 0.5 seconds have elapsed from tc4 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is started to rotate clockwise by the probability varying rotor motor 704a (FIG. 10(a )reference)). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 based on the fact that the ball has entered the probability variation ending switch 707 at tc3 (see S505 in FIG. 18). Then, from tc3 to tc4, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) (see FIG. 22). At tc5, which is 1 second after tc3, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p becomes 500 (corresponding to 1 second) (see FIG. 22). As a result, at tc5, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 22).

At tc6 o'clock, 360 seconds have elapsed from tc5 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball ejecting portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. During a period from tc5 o'clock to tc6 o'clock, the second sphere is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the certainty varying rotor 704, and the certainty varying rotor motor 704a of the certainty varying rotor 704 moves together with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed. It's spinning.

At tc7 o'clock, it is almost the same as tc6 o'clock, and the second ball stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be done. At tc7, the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) ends the probability variation. After tc 7 o'clock, the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the “angle A1” state, and by tc 8 the probability varying rotor 704 is in the “angle A1” state. The “maximum probability variation period”, which is the period from tc 0 o'clock to tc 7 o'clock, is about 722 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. That is, even if the probability-changed object entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entry into the probability-change occurrence switch 703, if the probability-changed object entrance ball counter 203n is 1 or more (one ball is ejected from the probability-change object 700). Even if it is performed, if the sphere still exists inside the probability altering compound 700), the probability variation is configured to continue (see S504 to S506 in FIG. 18). Thereby, even if a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability variation period can be extended in proportion to the number of the game balls that entered. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of inserting more game balls into the electric tulip 702, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the processing according to the number of balls entered in the probability variation generation switch 703 is not limited to this, and when there are two or more balls entered in the probability variation generation switch 703, for example, probability variation is started. After that, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 22) so that only one sphere exists inside the probability varying object 700 in one second. You may comprise so that one or more balls may be discharged from the ball discharge part 706. Specifically, during the 1 second, until the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 1, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves back and forth between the "angle A1" state and the "angle A2" state. It is configured to control the rotating body motor 704a. Further, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which only one ball enters the probability change generation switch 703. Specifically, immediately above the probability change generation switch 703, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked is provided. In the state where the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked, a route for guiding the blocked ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. Then, when a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 allows the ball on the path 703a to pass through, and then blocks the ball on the path 703a for 10 seconds, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability change is continued until all the game balls are detected by the probability change end switch 707, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Based on the fact that the first ball game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707, the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, the ball receiving portion 702 is rotated at high speed, and the remaining game balls are discharged. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the probability variation period can always be made constant, and the gambling property can be made constant. Further, the probability variation period may be continued up to a predetermined number of game balls, not limited to one ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11D, a case will be described in which the rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 of the probability varying object 700 is stopped (is stopped) during the probability variation. For example, during the probability variation, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates. Suppose it is stopped. As long as the rotation of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is stopped, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. In other words, there is a problem that the probability variation period is continued longer than usual because the probability variation ending switch 707 does not detect a ball that is retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

In addition, for example, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, Even if the magnet is applied to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended. However, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the means for preventing the illegal act, there is an effect that the probability change can be prevented from being illegally extended. A means for preventing the probability variation from being illegally extended will be described with reference to FIG.

At td0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At td0, the probability variation period memory 203o is set with a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the probability variation rotating body 704 to the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, 180000 (=360 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds)) corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Further, at td0, the probability variation period is measured. The counter 203p is set to 0. During the probability variation, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 in the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22) at every execution interval (2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt processing.

The time td1 is one second after td0, and is the time when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise by the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10(a)). ). At td1, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 (corresponding to 1 second).

The time td2 is when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time td1, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. I am in the middle of doing it. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B). At this time td2, the probability varying rotor motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the probability varying rotor 704 stops rotating. After td2, the probability varying rotating body 704 continues to stop at "angle A3". However, in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22), the probability variation is configured to end when the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o.

The time td3 is 241 seconds after td2, and the time td3 is 362 seconds after td0. At td3, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 181000 (corresponding to 362 seconds). Since the value of the probability variation period memory 203o is 180,000 (corresponding to 360 seconds) and the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation ends at td3 (Fig. 22 S807).

For example, during the probability variation, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 is stopped. Assume As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to be stopped, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. As a result, the probability change can be illegally extended. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a means for preventing this fraudulent action (finishing the probability change at the time td3 described above (see FIG. 22)), it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended. .. Further, for example, during the probability change, it is illegal to discharge the ball retained in the ball receiving part 704b to the route 707a in a state where the ball receiving part 704b of the probability changing rotating body 704 and the ball discharging part 706 overlap each other. For the purpose of prevention, even if a fraudulent act is made outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 and the magnet is applied to the front surface side of the ball discharging portion 706, a means for preventing the fraudulent act (previous change at td3 described above). End (see FIG. 22)), it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended.

In the present embodiment, the probability variation end switch 707 is set so that the probability variation ends when the game ball is detected, and the probability variation end switch 707 does not detect the game ball even after a predetermined time has elapsed. In the embodiment, the probability variation is forcibly ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the means for setting the probability variation to be ended in a predetermined time in advance and notifying the player of the time is the present embodiment. It may be configured to perform an effect using a game ball as described above. With such a configuration, fraud can be further prevented.

<Regarding the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 that controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input/output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input/output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. While receiving from 113, the display control device 114 sends a display command to the voice lamp control device 113 for notifying the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input/output port 238 via the bus line 240. The video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different jackpot winning probability or the number of prize balls paid out in one big jackpot, a model having exactly the same design configuration as that displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a model. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. Further, the ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is stored in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 identifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads it. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, Display data tables corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

Incidentally, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variable effect was stopped, While the third symbol, which is the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The fixed display effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving a fixed command from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. .. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is any of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. A performance is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

In the restart effect, when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, It is an effect to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swinged) around a predetermined position on the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation effect of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. You can recognize that.

The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect. The fluctuation display data table, which is the display data table for fluctuation effect, is prepared one table at a time according to the combination of the fluctuation effect pattern and the stop pattern that are set. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect, a fixed symbol for a deviation symbol as a stop symbol, a fixed probability jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot) for confirmation display, and a normal jackpot (15R normal) Jackpot) is displayed and confirmed.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since the display data table for change is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This rear surface type is one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the "sea stage", "palace stage", and "deep sea stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. And information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to C. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the state of the state corresponding to the back side type The display state information indicating whether to display the back image may be defined. The back image is displayed with the display range, brightness, and color tone changing with the passage of time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the initial state indicated by the display status information is displayed.

The display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. May be. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started Identify.

Further, the display state information is, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time after the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display on the third symbol display device 81), or the type information of the display state information together with the back surface type and the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether or not it is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of (displaying) is started) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address in which a rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each. For example, "0" is attached to the main symbol as an identification number, "1" is attached to the sub symbol between "0" and "1" as an identification number, and the main symbol of "1" is attached. “2” is attached to the symbol as an identification number, and “3” is attached to the sub symbol between “1” and “2” as the identification number. In this way, the sub-symbols are also given different identification numbers depending on the position where the sub-symbol is inserted (which main symbol is between them).

Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation effect until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the variation effect performed one time ago. Offset information with the identification number of the stop symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the variation effect performed one time ago. This is because it changes depending on the stop design. From the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed, as the symbol type information in each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

As the symbol type information, from the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before, the predetermined time when the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed is switched to is the third symbol at high speed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, at some addresses, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The display contents defined in this display data table are used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Then, the pointer 233b is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the voice output device 226 to output a voice that matches the display content notified by the display command.

When a plurality of display contents are defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the previously defined display contents, and the display command is generated. Send to 113.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, a time counter 233d, an effect permission flag 233e, and a changing flag 233f.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The display data table thus selected is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233b one by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the voice output device 226 to output a voice that matches the display content notified by the display command.

The pointer 233b is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content should be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233b to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame (S2702 in FIG. 30). (See), the value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233b is updated as described above, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 14). As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 14, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored is described, and the image controller 237 includes a character (described later) provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to scaling processing according to a magnification rate, rotation processing according to a rotation angle, and translucency according to a translucency value. Processing was performed, synthesis processing with other sprites was performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing was performed according to color information, and filtering processing was performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. An image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a to draw the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold sphere count symbol). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. , And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233d is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 ( Each time (see S2702 of FIG. 30) is executed, the clock counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The production permission flag 233e is a flag indicating whether the production is permitted by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. When the production permission flag 233e is on, the production is permitted, and when the production permission flag 233e is off, the production is not permitted.

The effect permission flag 233e is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). After the performance permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, when the display control device 114 receives the performance permission command, the performance permission flag 233e is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). In the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 231, it is used to determine whether or not to display the effect. The effect is displayed from the time when the effect permission flag 233e is turned on.

The changing flag 233f is a flag indicating whether the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing. When the changing flag 233f is on, the change effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing, and when the changing flag 233f is off, the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is not changing. ..

The changing flag 233f is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). In the voice lamp controller 113, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and is transmitted to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the variation flag 233f is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). Further, after the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, when the confirmation command is received by the display control device 114, the changing flag 233f is turned off (see S2805 in FIG. 31). The changing flag 233f is used to determine whether or not the changing effect is being generated. When the changing flag 233f is ON, the drawing effect of the display control device 114 (S2704 in FIG. 30) causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the changing effect corresponding to the display change pattern command. When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30).

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a design (background design or decorative design) displayed on the third design display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in a compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having a frame buffer area for storing one frame image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for two frames.

The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and at the same time, the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read-out image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 through the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. The processing is performed according to the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing the image data for all the sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data of one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data of the one frame previously written is read from the one frame buffer area, while the other The image data for the next one frame is written in the frame buffer area.

Thus, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

<Regarding control processing in main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 26. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, the probability variation end command, the probability variation abnormal command, and the production permission, which are set in the variation process (see FIG. 21) and the variation start process (see FIG. 23) that is one process of the variation process. A command or the like is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the sphere emission signal set when the sphere is emitted in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, 650a of the variable winning a prize device 65,650. A large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning openings 65a, 650a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a. To do. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, both the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 650a are configured to be opened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and either the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened. One of them may be opened. The specific winning opening to be opened may be determined by the type of jackpot, the jackpot pattern, a predetermined lottery, or the like, and the specific winning opening to be opened may be switched for each round.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is held in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i as the sphere passes through the second entrance gate (through gate) 267, The value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i is shifted to the public figure holding sphere execution area 203j. At this time, each of the reservations is held in the following manner: public figure hold second area → public figure hold first area, public figure hold third area → public figure hold second area, public figure hold fourth area → public figure hold third area. The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

When the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the universal figure holding ball execution area 203j matches the winning random number value, a lottery (winning lottery) is performed, and the winning random number value matches. Is, as a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), after performing the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, and after the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed. , The electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the universal figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the random number value of the hit, as a deviation of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), After performing the variable display of the second symbol on the 2 symbol display device 83, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a remains closed.

It should be noted that the winning random number values are set to different numbers depending on whether the game state is normal, during a time saving period, or during a probability change. That is, there are 149 random number values that are hits in the normal gaming state, and the values are "5-153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined that the game state is a win when the game state is normal. On the other hand, the number of random number values to be a hit when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability change is 250, and the range is "1-250". In other words, when the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the player is in a winning position when the gaming state is in the time saving or the probability changing state.

Further, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability variation than in the normal state. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined that the second symbol (ordinary symbol) hits is released for a longer time when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a certain variation.

In this way, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during the probability change and during the shortening of time than in the normal case. Further, as described above, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that during the normal time, so that the symbol "○" is likely to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the time reduction is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of being a big hit depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is low even in a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the 2nd entrance 640, the 1st entrance It is set higher than when a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). The switch reading process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented, and their counter values are the maximum values. (In the present embodiment, when it reaches 899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively), it is cleared to 0 respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 or It is read as an initial value of the second per random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, the processing for displaying by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109). Next, the start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, the switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this switch reading processing (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to mainly enter the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 which form the probability variation object 700. This is processing for detecting and executing processing according to the detection, and processing for reading the input states of various switches connected to the main control device 110.

When the switch reading process is executed, it is first determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S200). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S200: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. Since the pachinko machine 10 does not transition the game state to the probability change during the jackpot, the ball enters the switch (through switch 701, probability change generation switch 703, probability change end switch 707) of the probability change object 700 that can change the game state. There is no need to distinguish between big hits. Even if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON by the process of S200, the process of opening the electric tulip 702 is not executed, and the game ball does not enter the electric tulip 702 until the jackpot game ends. Can be set to

If it is not a big hit (S200: No), it is detected whether the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201). Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on in order to determine whether or not the electric tulip 702 should be opened. Yes (S202). If it is determined that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S202: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (the electric accessory 702a is opened) (S203), and the process proceeds to S204.

As a result, the game ball can enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the probability variation start schedule 203m is off (S202: No), the process proceeds to S204. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in the open state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball does not enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. .. If the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit mentioned above or 4R probability variation big hit mentioned above) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 of FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on (see S907 of FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by inserting the ball into the through switch 701 after the jackpot game is over after the probability variation jackpot is determined (the gaming state is during the time saving of the "low probability state"), and the electric tulip 702 can be opened. It becomes possible to insert a ball into the probability change generation switch 703 inside the tulip 702. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S201: No), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, in the processing of S204, it is determined whether or not the probability variation generation switch 703 has detected a game ball (S204). Then, when the probability variation generation switch 703 determines that a game ball has been detected (S204: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S205), the probability variation start processing (S206) is executed, and S207 is executed. Process shifts to. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. (For example, up to 4) The probability variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S204: No), the process proceeds to S207.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the electric tulip 702 is opened, the open state is maintained until the probability change generation switch 703 detects the game ball, so the player surely plays the electric tulip 702 with the game ball. Can be entered. In addition, even if there are few remaining balls, even if the game ball cannot be inserted into the electric tulip 702, the game ball can be inserted into the electric tulip 702 after purchase, so that the player It is possible to prevent the person from getting impatient.

Next, in the process of S207, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball (S207). When it is determined that the probability variation end switch 707 detects the game ball (S207: Yes), the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) is executed. Note that the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S209), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. If is not changing (S209: No), the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211. The probability variation ending process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: Yes), the process proceeds to S211.

Here, in the process of S209, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209), and it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation ending process (S210). Explain why.

For example, during the probability change, immediately before the variation effect is stopped, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”, and the game balls that are parked in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 are equal to or less than the ball discharging portion 706. It is assumed that the probability variation end switch 707 flows down the path 707a and is detected, that is, "a situation in which the probability variation seems to have finished just before the stop of the variation effect". In this case, the player may be confused as to whether the jackpot probability of the fluctuation effect is the probability of probability change or the probability of normal change. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the probability variation end switch 707 has detected the game ball (S207: Yes), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: In the case of Yes), in the switch reading process, the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed, and the probability variation end process (S210) is not executed.

In the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21), after the fluctuation stops (S717), the probability change end process (S210) is executed. In the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19), the probability variation ending command is set (S403 in FIG. 19). Thereafter, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation end command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2808 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation end” on the third symbol display device 81 (see S2809 in FIG. 31). ), the player recognizes the end of the probability change by visually recognizing the display of “end of probability change”.

That is, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball, the probability variation is not ended while the variation effect is changing, and the probability variation is terminated after the variation effect is stopped and the player is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-mentioned “situation in which it seems that the probabilistic change has finished just before the stop of the variable effect”.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is not changing (S209: No), is the probability of the next big jackpot of the fluctuating effect being the probability of being changing, even if the changing is finished at that time? Since there is no confusion as to whether the probability is normal, the probability variation end process (S210) is executed immediately after the probability change end scheduled process (S208) is executed to end the probability change.

By configuring in this manner, the probability of variation in the special symbol, that is, the period during which the lottery opportunity is not given, is extended to extend the probability variation period, thereby changing the predetermined payout rate or the like of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress defects. In addition, since the end of the probability change is set at an easily understandable timing, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Next, in the process of S211, other processes are executed (S211), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. In the process of S211, the process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In the present embodiment, when the first symbol (special symbol) is changing, the probability variation is not ended, but the probability variation is terminated after the first symbol is stopped (configuration that delays the completion of the probability variation). However, without being limited thereto, the probability change may be configured to end even when the first symbol is changing. In this case, by delaying and displaying the display mode indicating the end of the probability change until the fluctuation of the first symbol is stopped, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is confused. Further, with such a configuration, the probability variation period can be made constant, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Next, the probability variation start processing (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the probability variation start process (S206). The probability variation start process (S206) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation start process is performed based on the ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703. Is a process for starting.

When the probability variation start processing (FIG. 17, S206) is executed, first, 1 is added to the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n that counts the number of game balls entered in the electric tulip 702 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the probability variation start processing is ended.

If the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned off (S303). Next, a value corresponding to the probability variation period is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S304). In the present embodiment, 180000 (=360 seconds/(timer) corresponding to 360 seconds, which is a period during which the probability varying rotor 704 rotates from the state of the angle A1 to the state of the angle A2. The execution interval of the interrupt process (2 milliseconds) is set, then 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S305), the probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned on (S306), and the probability variation start process is ended. ..

Here, the process of S304 to S306 is a process of transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to a probability change. In the process of S306, the game state transits from a low probability state (time saving state) to a high probability state (probably changing). After that, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used for the jackpot determination is for the “high probability state”.

Here, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is off (S303) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703. This is to execute the process of transitioning to the probability change only when the first ball is entered. That is, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first sphere, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, so that all the processes of S301 to S306 are executed. Next, when the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned off (S303), so the processes of S301 and S302 are executed, and the processes of S303 to S306. Is not executed. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change generation switch 703, the probability change can be normally started.

<Scheduled end scheduled processing>
Next, the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the probability variation end schedule processing (S208). The probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707, This is a process of scheduling the probability change end.

When the probability variation end scheduled processing (FIG. 18, S208) is executed, first, the probability variation accessory entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S502). If the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is determined to be 0 (S502: Yes), there is no ball entering the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). Therefore, the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) turns on the probability variation ending schedule flag 203q to end the probability variation (S503), terminates the probability variation ending schedule process, and returns to the switch reading process. As a result, when the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is executed next, the probability variation ends.

When it is determined in S502 that the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S502: No), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the "angle A1" (S504). .. Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S505), a value corresponding to the probability variation period (180000 corresponding to 360 seconds) is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S506), and the probability variation ending scheduled process is ended. Return to the switch reading process.

Here, the process of S504 to S506 is not a process of scheduling the end of the probability variation, but the "longest period of the probability variation" is doubled or tripled according to the number of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703. Is a process for The processing of S504 to S506 is executed when the probability variation generation switch 703 has a plurality of balls. When there are a plurality of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703, since the balls are retained in the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S504), the ball that has been stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. One second after S506 is executed, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) causes the probability variation rotating body 704 to start rotating clockwise (see FIG. 11(c)).

It should be noted that when the processing of S504 is executed, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704” is 300 degrees, in the process of S504, the MPU 201 changes the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the processing of S504. Here, the time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) required to turn the probability varying rotating body 704 counterclockwise to the state of “angle A1” is also included in the probability varying period, and the probability variation set during that time is also included. Since the value of the period measurement counter 203p has been updated, the processing for rotating the "angle AX" is executed after the probability variable rotating body 704 has moved to the position of the "angle A1" and stopped for 0.5 seconds. .. Thereby, even when the probability variation period is doubled or tripled, it can be set constantly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that variations occur in the probability variation period.

<Probability change end processing>
Next, the probability variation ending process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the probability variation ending process (S210). The probability variation ending process (S210) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation ending switch 707 receives the probability change. Is a process of terminating. Further, the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed even after the variation is stopped in the variation process (see FIG. 21). When a ball entering the probability variation end switch 707 is detected, if it is changing, in the variation process (see FIG. 21), after the variation stops, the probability variation end process (S210) ends the probability variation, and the third symbol “Probability change end” is displayed on the display device 81. As a result, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-mentioned "situation in which it seems that the probabilistic change has finished just before the stop of the variable effect".

When the probability variation end process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is on (S401). The probability variation end schedule flag 203q is turned on in the probability variation termination schedule process (see FIG. 18). If it is determined in the process of S401 that the probability variation ending schedule 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S401: No), the probability variation ending process is terminated. As described above, when the probability variation ending schedule flag 203q is not on, the probability variation is not terminated even if the probability variation ending process is executed. As a result, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21), even if the probability variation end process (S210) is executed after the fluctuation has stopped, if the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is off, the probability variation is not ended.

If it is determined that the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is on (S401: Yes), the probability variation termination schedule flag 203q is turned off (S402), the probability variation end command is set (S403), and the probability variation in progress flag is turned off (S404). ), and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” (S405), and the probability variation ending process is ended. In the processing of S404, the game state transitions from a high probability state (during probability change) to a low probability state, a time saving state (time saving). After that, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the one for the “low probability state” is used as the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used to determine the jackpot.

When the probability variation ending process is executed, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, in the process of S405, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to perform the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the processing of S405. Thereby, the probability variation period can be set to be constant.

By the processing of S405, since the probability variation rotating body 704 is set to the state of “angle A1” at the end of the probability variation, the sphere detected by the probability variation generation switch 703 is the probability variation when the sphere enters the probability variation object 700 next time. Since it flows down the path 703a below the generation switch 703 and can be received by the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704, the probability varying rotor 704 can be rotated thereafter every one second, and the probability variation period is reduced to the player. It can be informed easily.

<Starting prize processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the starting winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S110). The start winning process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and starts. When a prize is won, a process of holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process of counting the number of reserved balls are executed.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variable effect due to the start prize to the first ball entrance 64) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S602). Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, a variation effect associated with the starting prize in the first ball entrance 64 is produced. If the number of reserved balls NA<4 is not satisfied (S602: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA<4 in the variable effect associated with the starting prize in the first ball entrance 64 is <4 (S602: Yes). The value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA) is incremented by 1 (S603), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S604).

In the subsequent process of S605, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) (S605). Here, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S605: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variation effect associated with the start prize to the second ball entrance 640) It is determined whether the number of reserved balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S606). Then, whether or not there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S605: No), or even if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640, the variation effect associated with the starting winning in the second ball entrance 640 If the number of reserved balls NB<4 is not satisfied (S606: No), the start winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S605: Yes) and the number of reserved balls NB<4 in the variable effect associated with the starting prize in the second ball entrance 640 is <S460: Yes. Then, the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203 (reserved sphere number NB) is incremented by 1 (S607), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S608). Then, the start winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

<Variation processing>
Next, the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S109). This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S701). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated.

If it is not a big hit (S701: No), the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed. Note that the probability variation period progress processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S703), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is not changing (S703: No). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S704). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S704: No), the present process ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S704, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S704: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started, First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 number-of-reserved balls counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect associated with the start winning in the second ball entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S705). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e (reserved sphere number NB) is greater than 0 (S705: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e (reserved sphere number NB ) Is decremented by 1 (S706), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S707).

In this data shift processing, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure 2 Reservation 2nd area → special map 2 reservation 1st area, special map 2 reservation 3rd area → special map 2 reservation 2nd area, special map 2 reservation 4th area → special map 2 reservation 3rd area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

After the data shift process, the special figure classification flag 203k is set to ON (S708), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) that starts from now on is accompanied by the start winning of the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the variation start process (S709) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As a result of the processing of S705, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding ball number NB) is not greater than 0, that is, the holding ball number NB is 0, and the starting winning award to the second ball entrance 640. If it is determined that there is no variation effect that has been withheld (S705: No), then the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203d (the hold ball of the variation effect that accompanies the start winning into the first entrance 64). It is determined whether (number NA) is larger than 0 (S710).

As a result, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the holding ball number NA is 0, and it is held with the start winning in the first ball entrance 64. If it is determined that there is no variation effect (S710: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA) is larger than 0 (S710: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA). Is subtracted by 1 (S711), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203d is shifted (S712).

This data shift processing shifts the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a to the special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, and Reservation 2nd area → special map 1 reservation 1st area, special map 1 reservation 3rd area → special map 1 reservation 2nd area, special map 1 reservation 4th area → special map 1 reservation 3rd area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

After the data shift process, the special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF (S713), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) that starts from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to S709, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed (S709), and this process is ended.

In this variation process, when the variation effect can be started (S704: Yes), it is first confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S705). ), if the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, if the variation effect associated with the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is held (S705: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding-ball-counter 203d, that is, regardless of whether or not the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. The variation effect is started based on the data (each counter value). As a result, the starting winning in the second entrance 640 is configured so that the jackpot lottery is prioritized over the starting winning in the first entrance 64 and the variation effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. There is.

In the process of S703, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S714). The display time during change of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time is If it has not elapsed (S714: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S715), and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LEDs 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, the currently lit LED is red. If so, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed (S714: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S716). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S709) described later with reference to FIG.

That is, in the process of S709, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it is a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (probability variation jackpot that makes it easier to enter the ball into the probability variation generation switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state after the maximum round number 15 round jackpot), 4R probability variation jackpot (after the maximum round number of four rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot that makes it easier to enter the ball into the probability variation occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state) or 15R normal jackpot (maximum round After the jackpot of 15 rounds, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a jackpot that is in a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the 4R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue color when the 15R regular jackpot is hit. Turn on the LED and. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S716, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. A confirmation command is set for confirmation in synchronization with lighting (S717), and the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is executed (S210). Upon receiving the confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the confirmation command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

The probability variation end process (S210) is also executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability change is performed based on the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707. This is the processing to end. Further, the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed even after the variation effect is stopped in the variation process (see FIG. 21). If it is changing when the ball is detected in the probability variation end switch 707, in the variation process (see FIG. 21), after the variation effect is stopped, the probability variation is terminated by the probability variation termination process (S210), and the third “Probability change end” is displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, there is an effect that the player will not be confused even in the above-mentioned "situation in which it seems that the probable change has finished just before the stop of the variation effect".

After S210, it is determined whether or not the variation effect that has just stopped is a big hit (S718). If it is not a big hit (S718: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is a big hit (S718: Yes), it is determined whether or not the certainty variation object entrance counter 203n is 1 or more (S719). If it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S719: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is 1 or more (S719: Yes), the gaming state is in the probability variation, and the ball is in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 of the probability variation object 700. Since it has stayed, the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise to the “angle A2” in order to eject the ball of the probability varying accessory 700 (S720). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. The discharged balls flow down the path 707a below the ball discharging unit 706, and are detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). With this detection as a trigger, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). In addition, when the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is 2 or more, the probability variation rotating body 704 is reciprocated between the state of “angle A1” and the state of “angle A2” before the jackpot game is started, After the jackpot game, there is no sphere in the probability altering object 700.

<Probability period progress processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22, the probability variation period progress processing (S702) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the probability variation period progress processing (S702). The probability variation period progress process (S702) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 21) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotor 704 is rotated to perform the probability variation. This is the process of advancing the period. The probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), when the big hit is not in progress in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) (S701: No). Processing.

In the probability variation period progress processing (FIG. 22, S702), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203l is on (S801). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S801: No), this processing ends. As a result, even if the probability variation period progress processing is executed other than during the probability variation, the processing of S802 to S808 is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is on (S801: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S802).

Next, in the process of S803, it is determined whether the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S803). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S803: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S803: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is “angle A2” or more (S804).

Here, the probability variation rotator 704 is "angle A2 or more" includes the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge part 706 overlap, and further rotates clockwise from the "angle A2". This is the case. In the processing of S804, the MPU 201 determines from the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 the current angle of the probability varying rotor motor 704a to determine whether or not the probability varying rotor 704 is "angle A2" or more. ..

If it is determined that the probability varying rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability varying rotor 704 is not equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (that is, less than the “angle A2”) (S804: No), the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by the “angle AX”. It is rotated (S805).

Here, since the process of S802 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) during the probability variation period, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is One is added every 2 milliseconds during the probability change. In the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more, and this value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, the process (S805) of rotating the probability variation rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle by "angle AX" is not executed for one second.

In the case where a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the arrival of one ball, the inside of the probability variation target object 700 (from the probability variation generation switch 703 to the probability variation end switch 707). If there is a sphere in (between), the probability varying rotator 704 rotates counterclockwise from “angle A2” to “angle A1” for 0.5 seconds after the detection of the incoming ball, and then 0. For 5 seconds, the probability varying rotating body 704 is stopped in the state of “angle A1”. Thereby, the “probability variation longest period” can be constantly doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703.

Further, in the processing of S804, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), this processing ends. The probability variation rotating body 704 being in the “angle A2” state means that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 enters the state of “angle A2”, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to rotate the probability varying rotator 704 further clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S805, this processing is completed. As a result, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering the ball, and if there is no other ball inside the probability variation target object 700 (between the probability variation generation switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the probability variation ends. , The probability varying rotator 704 maintains the state of “angle A2”. After that, when the end of the probability variation period is set, the rotation is set to "angle A1". In the present embodiment, the "angle A2" is rotated counterclockwise at a high speed from the angle "A1", but the invention is not limited to this, and the rotation may be clockwise. .. With this configuration, the probability varying rotating body 704 can be moved to the “angle A1” earlier.

Further, by the process of S805, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AX”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap (from ta1 to ta3 in FIG. 11). ) Is set to 360 seconds. 180,000 corresponding to this 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Since the process of S805 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) during the probability change (S801: No), the “angle AX” is “ The angle A1-A2 of the rotating body 704"/(value of the probability variation period memory 203o)" can be calculated. In this embodiment, the "angle AX" is 0.00166... (=300/180,000) degrees.

When the processing of S805 is executed, then, in order to determine whether the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not it is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806). .. If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: No), this processing ends.

If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: Yes), the probability variation in progress flag is turned off to forcibly terminate the probability variation (S807). An abnormal command is set (S808), and this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 of FIG. 31). As a result, when it is determined that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded, the probability variation is forcibly ended, so that the probability variation period is not unduly extended.

If it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), the processes of S805 to S808 are not executed. As a result, immediately after the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is detected by the probability variation ending switch 707. At that time, if the variation effect is changing. For example, even if the probability variation is not immediately terminated but the probability variation is ended when the variation effect is stopped, the processing of S806 to S808 is executed during the variation of the variation effect to set the probability variation abnormal command. Absent.

<Operation and effect of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates the ball retained in the receiving portion 704b at a constant speed, and the probability variation completion switch 707 is activated. This is a period until the probability change ends in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19) when the ball arrival is detected. That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the conventional gaming machine, the fluctuation effect period tends to be longer as the fluctuation effect period has a higher jackpot reliability (eg, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation effect period is 90 seconds, etc.). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, it is assumed that, during the probability change, a change pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high reliability of the jackpot and a long change effect period is made plural times among the change patterns described with reference to FIG. 9. However, since the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, the probability variation period does not become long due to the variable effect period. In the conventional ST machine, even if the fluctuation pattern that the jackpot is highly reliable and the fluctuation production period is long is made multiple times during the probability change, it does not hit the jackpot, and the game becomes monotonous if the probability change period is simply long. There is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. According to the pachinko machine 10, the "maximum probability variation period" is constant even when a variation production having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is performed, so that the player is not given to the player by simply prolonging the probability variation period. Pleasure can be reduced.

Then, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, there are more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern with high reliability of the jackpot is long and the variation effect period is long, and the variation pattern with the variation effect period with low reliability of the jackpot is not executed, the remaining period until the probability variation ends is: The decrease is larger than when a change pattern having a short change effect period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation effect, the number of chances for the big hit lottery will be reduced. As a result, the player's desire for a big hit in the variation effect is increased. That is, the enthusiasm for the change effect is particularly enhanced.

Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the big hit lottery differs depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that there is an effect that a new game property can be provided to the player. In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

<Function and effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that the probability varying rotor 704a stops rotating due to a failure of the probability varying rotor motor 704a or an illegal disconnection of a line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to stop, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a, Even if a fraudulent act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined in S806 that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation flag is turned off (S807). Since the probability change is forcibly ended, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S709). This variation start processing (S709) is executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, While carrying out a lottery (big hit lottery) of “big hit” or “out”, an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the variation start process, first, a jackpot lottery process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c (S901). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state (that is, the normal state, the time saving period, and the probability variation flag 203l being off), it is associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. If "7,307,582" is a big hit random number value, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (that is, the probability variation is in progress, the probability variation flag 203l is on), "high" in the jackpot random number table 202a. "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618 associated with the stochastic state" , 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" is a big hit random number value. In the process of S901, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storing area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it means that the jackpot is a jackpot. To determine.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the process of S901 (S901: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation flag is on (S902), and the probability variation flag is determined to be on ( (S902: Yes), according to the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, the number of winnings to the specific winning openings 65a and 650a per one round of the big hit game is determined (S903). That is, in one round of the jackpot game, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened until the balls win the number of winnings per one round of the jackpot game determined in S903. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o, and when the probability variation period measurement counter 203p at the time of jackpot determination is a value corresponding to less than 60 seconds, the number of winnings per round. To 10. Similarly, in the case of 60 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds, the number of prizes per round is nine. In the case of 120 seconds or more and less than 180 seconds, the number of prizes per round is eight. In the case of 180 seconds or more and less than 240 seconds, the number of prizes per round is 7. In the case of 240 seconds or more and less than 300 seconds, the number of prizes per round is 6. In the case of 300 seconds or more, the number of winning prizes per round is 5. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a, 650a and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, if the number of prizes per round is 10, the number of prize balls per round is 150 Is determined. As a result, when a big hit occurs during the probability variation, the earlier the probability variation is started (the smaller the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is), the larger the number of prizes and the number of prize balls per round of the jackpot game. And many.

When it is determined that the probability variation flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S902: No), the number of prize balls is determined (S904). In the present embodiment, in one round of the jackpot game, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened until 10 balls are won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a, 650a and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, if the number of prizes per round is 10, the number of prize balls per round is 150 Is decided.

<Operation and effect of technical idea 9>
In the present embodiment, when the big hit lottery process (S901) is a big hit during the probability change, in the process of S903, the smaller the value of the probability change period measurement counter 203p is, the more the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player is determined. Configured to. That is, the earlier the lapse of the probability change, the greater the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.

For example, in the case of a big hit during a probability change, a new probability change is started after the big hit game, and a player wants a big hit at an early stage after the probability change starts. Is. According to the pachinko machine 10, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the number of prize balls is increased, so that the player is pleased twice. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs at a stage when the elapsed time from the start of the probability change is late, the player is discouraged because the number of prize balls is small. On the other hand, if it is decided that the probability change will start anew after the jackpot, not only will you be discouraged, but you will find new hope. In this way, the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, so that the pachinko machine 10 can provide a new interest in which the probability variation period corresponds to the number of prize balls.

In the present embodiment, the winning number per round is increased/decreased according to the remaining time (elapsed time) of the probability variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be always fixed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the payout amount of the jackpot game constant and keep the gambling ability constant.

In the process of S903 or S904, after determining the number of prize balls, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c. The display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S905). Here, when the special figure classification flag is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started from now on is to be executed along with the start winning of the second entrance 640. As shown, the jackpot type table for the “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the special figure classification flag is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is to be executed in association with the start winning of the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of S905 is a probability variation jackpot (S906). That is, when the jackpot type is the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is the certainty variation jackpot, and when the jackpot type is the 15R regular jackpot, it is not the certainty variation jackpot. If it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S906: Yes), the probability variation start schedule 203m is turned on (S907), and the process proceeds to S908. When it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S906: No), the process proceeds to S908.

Since the probability change start flag 203m is turned on in the process of S907 and the ball is then thrown into the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in the middle of a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened (see FIG. 16). It becomes easier for the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 that triggers the transition to the state.

When it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the processing of S901 (S901: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S910). In the process of S910, in the case of the variation effect associated with the start winning in the first entrance 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is displayed, and in the variation effect associated with the starting prize in the second entrance 640. In the case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the third mode As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set to the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach. Then, the process proceeds to S908.

In the processing of S908, the variation pattern is determined (S908). This fluctuation pattern is determined by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, the deviation pattern table 202d (the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2). Is based on. In the processing of S908, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is set.

A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S905 or S910 is set (S909), and this process ends. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15). Sent.

<NMI interrupt processing>
Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

<Startup processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if it is not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the processing is also shifted to S1111 in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1111. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1207 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1111). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1112, S1113) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S1112, S1113) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1112, S1113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1112, S1113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1110, interruption is permitted (S1110). In the process of S1110, a production permission command is set, and thereafter, the production by the sub control device is permitted. Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

Although illustration is omitted, the probability variable rotating body 704 is subjected to initialization and processing for returning to the state before power-off in this startup processing. When the power is cut off during the probability variation period, the rotation amount of the probability variation rotating body 704 is set based on the value of the remaining probability variation period. If the power-off occurs when the probability variation period is set, and then the RAM erase switch is turned on and the power is turned on, the remaining probability variation period is set to 0, and the probability variation rotating body 704. Is set to "angle A1".

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the probability varying rotor 704 is configured to be backed up to the state when the power is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated. Alternatively, the remaining probability variation period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After that, the probability variation rotating body 704 may be rotated to the “angle A2” based on the probability variation period becoming 0.

Further, when the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is 2 or more, the probability variation period corresponding to the value is set, displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability variation period is set. May be. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the probability variation period and the game balls in the probability variation role object 700 are discharged by the initial setting processing or the like, the probability variation period is not set correctly after the power is turned on again. The problem can be suppressed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As a summary, the counter update processing of S1203 and S1204 is executed with the remaining time of 4 msec cycle.

In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201). If the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1202). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201 and the process of S1201 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1202: No), during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1203, S1204).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1203). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 and 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1204). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

Here, since the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds during the execution of each processing of S1201 to S1204, the processing of S1203 and the processing of S1204 are executed for 4 milliseconds. The remaining time of the cycle is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1201, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1205 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1205), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1206). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1207), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1208), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

<Flowchart of voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

<Startup processing>
First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2117 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during the execution (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 28), the power-off process of S2117 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S2117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the processing is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

On the other hand, if the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2117, the audio lamp control is performed. It is started when the MPU 221 of the device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006), and then the S2008 Move to processing. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2117 of FIG. 28). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2117 is instantaneously performed when the startup process of this time is reached while the power-off flag is turned on. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process in S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004 when the process in S2008 is performed through the processes in S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

<Main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started, or since the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2112 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2111.

In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2111 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S2112 and the command determination processing of S2113 in a short cycle.

By executing the command determination process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110.

By performing the variation display process of S2112 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variation effect without delay based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received by the command determination process.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2109 described later is set (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed (S2105), and then the reserved quantity display updating process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the number of hold balls of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change to the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preliminary announcement character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S2108). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Then, a ramp edit process is executed (S2109), and then a sound edit/output process is executed (S2110). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound edit/output process, the voice data stored in the RAM 223 is decoded in accordance with the display command (including the reach display command) from the display control device 114 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the decoded audios of all the channels are mixed and the sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set, the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing/output processing, and the alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226.

After the processing of S2110, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output processing of S2110 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S2111, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, the variable display process, which is a process set to transmit these generated commands to the display control device 114, is executed (S2112).

In the process of S2112, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this variable display processing, a plurality of counters (a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of jackpot, a counter for selecting a stop symbol at the time of disengagement, etc.) mounted on the voice lamp control device 113 are updated, and the value of the counter and the main value are updated. Based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set, and the variation display patterns (short deviation, long deviation, normal reach, super reach, special) Reach) is set. The set stop pattern or variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

Next, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2113). When a command from the main controller 110 is received, if the command is used by the voice lamp controller 113 according to the command, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 233, and used by the display controller 114. If it is a command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The confirmation command, the probability variation end command, the probability variation abnormality command, and the effect permission command from the main control device 110 are transmitted to the display control device 114 as they are.

When the process of S2113 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

<Flowchart of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal is detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. To do.

The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2601). Specifically, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

After the process of S2601, an interrupt permission is set (S2602), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2603), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 14) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

In this V interruption process, first, a command determination process (S2701) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2702) is executed. In the command determination process (S2701), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. , In the display data table buffer 233a. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table is set in the clock counter 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, the variation pattern command for display, the stop type command for display, and the like are likely to be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The command determination process (S2701) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2701, display setting processing is executed (S2702). In the display setting process (S2702), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S2701), etc., based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the third symbol display device. At 81, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the display content (see FIG. 13) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, A process for generating a display command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content and transmitting the generated display command to the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.

In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are displayed in order from the previously specified display contents. The display command to represent is produced|generated, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the command determination process and the display setting process cause the display control device 114 to transmit a command (for example, a display variation) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. According to (pattern command) or the like, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 should not be changed, but should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

When the program is executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, it is complicated and diversified with the effect image. Since an enormous load is applied to the start-up and execution of the enormous programs, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

In the display setting process (S2702), if the jackpot is in the midst of jackpot, the jackpot effect display setting is performed, the number of rounds of jackpots displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning spheres, a different background for each round, and the like. Display settings are made. If the probability change is in progress, the display setting of the period until the probability change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ends (or the elapsed time from the start of the probability change) is set. Each time the display setting process (S2702) is executed, the clock counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processing that should be performed.

After the display setting process (S2702) is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2703). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting processing (S2702), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes that image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2704). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated from the types of various sprites forming one frame, the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction determined in the task process (S2703). , In the drawing list area 233c. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list.

<Command determination processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a command determination process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command determination process is executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30), analyzes the content of the command stored in the command buffer area, and executes the process according to the command.

When the command interruption process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the display variation pattern command is received (S2801). When the display change pattern command is received (S2801: YES), the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern type indicated by the display change pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233a (S2802). Then, the changing flag 233f is turned on (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. When the changing flag 233f is turned on, the change effect corresponding to the change pattern command for display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2804.

Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received (S2804). When the confirmation command is received (S2804: Yes), the changing flag 233f is turned off (S2805). When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). After S2805, the process proceeds to S2806. The time from the reception of the display variation pattern command (S2801: YES) to the reception of the confirmation command, that is, the variation production period, is as described with reference to FIGS. 8C and 8D. Moreover, it depends on the fluctuation pattern. The variation effect period of this embodiment is 7 seconds for short deviation, 10 seconds for long deviation, 30 seconds for normal reach, 60 seconds for super reach, and 90 seconds for special reach. If the confirmation command has not been received (S2804: No), the process proceeds to S2806.

Next, it is determined whether or not the production permission command set in the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 25) has been received (S2806). When the production permission command is received (S2806: Yes), the production permission flag 233e is turned on (S2807). From the time the effect permission flag 233e is turned on, the effect is displayed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the production permission command has not been received (S2806: No), the process proceeds to S2808.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end command has been received (S2808). When the probability variation end command is received (S2808: Yes), the data for displaying "probability variation end" on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2809). On the other hand, if the probability variation end command has not been received (S2808: No), the process proceeds to S2810.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation abnormal command is received (S2810). When the probability variation abnormality command is received (S2810: Yes), the data for displaying "probability variation abnormality" on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2811). On the other hand, if the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2810: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

Next, it is determined whether or not another command is received (S2812). When another command is received (S2812: Yes), a process (S2813) corresponding to the other command is executed, and this process ends. If the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2812: No), this processing ends.

<Operation and effect of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates the ball retained in the receiving portion 704b at a constant speed, and the probability variation completion switch 707 is activated. This is a period until the probability change ends in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19) when the ball arrival is detected. That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the conventional gaming machine, the fluctuation effect period tends to be longer as the fluctuation effect period has a higher jackpot reliability (eg, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation effect period is 90 seconds, etc.). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, it is assumed that, during the probability change, a change pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high reliability of the jackpot and a long change effect period is made plural times among the change patterns described with reference to FIG. 9. However, since the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, the probability variation period does not become long due to the variable effect period. In the conventional ST machine, even if the fluctuation pattern that the jackpot is highly reliable and the fluctuation production period is long is made multiple times during the probability change, it does not hit the jackpot, and the game becomes monotonous if the probability change period is simply long. There is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. According to the pachinko machine 10, the "maximum probability variation period" is constant even when a variation production having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is performed, so that the player is not given to the player by simply prolonging the probability variation period. Pleasure can be reduced.

Then, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, there are more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern with high reliability of the jackpot is long and the variation effect period is long, and the variation pattern with the variation effect period with low reliability of the jackpot is not executed, the remaining period until the probability variation ends is: The decrease is larger than when a change pattern having a short change effect period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation effect, the number of chances for the big hit lottery will be reduced. As a result, the player's desire for a big hit in the variation effect is increased. That is, the enthusiasm for the variation production is heightened.

Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the big hit lottery differs depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that there is an effect that a new game property can be provided to the player. In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) to start the probability variation, and then the probability variation rotating body. The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) causes the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 to rotate the ball retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation ends. The switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and the period until the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, during the probability change period, the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering the ball and starts the probability change by the probability change start processing (see FIG. 17). The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) only when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the rotating body 704 is changing in the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Accordingly, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated at a constant speed, the probability variation ending switch 707 detects the ball entering, and the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is completed until the probability variation ends. Becomes That is, the period of probability variation elapses only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying after the probability variation starts. That is, the probability variation ends after the variation effect is performed for a predetermined period after the probability variation starts.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in the timing of execution of the probability variation period progressing process (S702 of FIG. 22) performed in the variation process (S109) performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Except for the points, it is the same as the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<The angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability varying>
With reference to FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the operation of the probability altering compound 700 in the second embodiment will be described. 32A and 32B schematically show the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 of the probability varying object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, and FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change.

First, with reference to FIG. 32A, the relationship between the angle of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability variation will be described. At ta0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At ta0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

ta1 o'clock is a time when one second has elapsed from ta0 o'clock, and is a time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)).

The ta2 o'clock is when 120 seconds have elapsed from the ta1 o'clock, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at a constant speed. I am in the middle of doing it. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B).

At ta3 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from ta2 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotating body 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap without stopping (at ta1 From ta3) to 360 seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) of the fluctuation process of S109 (see FIG. 33). This is because the "angle AX" is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is changing.

Ta4 o'clock is almost the same as ta3 o'clock, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At ta4, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After ta4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by ta5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after ta4 o'clock, The probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, at ta4, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". In addition, as long as the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, the “maximum probability variation period”, which is the period from ta0 to ta4, is about 361 seconds.

During the period during the probability change (the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00), the lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability variation will be described. At tb0, the ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At tb0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

The time tb1 is the time when one second has elapsed from the time tb0, and is the time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)).

The time tb2 is the time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time tb1. Before tb2, for example, the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball to the game board 13 has a failure, the nail on the game board 13 is clogged with the ball, the game board to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is the case where the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has not been entered due to factors such as the nail on 13 being tightened. Then, at tb2, the values of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b become 0, and thereafter, the variation effect is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation period advancing processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) is performed only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying, by the probability variation rotating body 704. The probability varying rotor motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed. As a result, in the state in which the variation effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 32B, the probability varying rotating body 704 does not rotate and continues to stop at the “angle A3”. That is, the period of probability change does not elapse in the state where the variation effect is not executed.

At tb3 o'clock, about 120 seconds have elapsed from tb2 o'clock. This is the time when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 before tb3 and a new variation effect is started. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation period advancing processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) is performed only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying, by the probability variation rotating body 704. Since the probability varying rotor motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating at a constant speed from tb3 around the probability varying rotor motor 704a. That is, if it is changing, the period of probability change passes.

At tb4 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from tb4 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the total time (from tb1 o'clock) of the variation time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap. The total of tb2 o'clock and tb3 o'clock to tb4 o'clock) is 360 seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) of the fluctuation process of S109 (see FIG. 33). This is because the "angle AX" is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is changing.

The time tb5 is substantially the same as the time tb4, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At tb5, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). After tb5 o'clock, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of "angle A1", and by tb6 at which 0.5 seconds has elapsed from tb5 o'clock, the probability varying rotator 704 becomes "angle". The state becomes “A1”. During the period during the probability change (the period from tb0 to tb5), the lottery is performed in response to the fact that the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 have been entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used.

<Variation processing>
With reference to FIG. 33, the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed. The variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation process in the second embodiment (FIG. 33) are different from each other in the first implementation except that the execution timing of the probability variation period progress process (S702 in FIG. 22) is different. It is the same as the form.

In the first embodiment, if it is not a big hit (S701: No in FIG. 22), the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and if the changing time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is updated (S715), and then the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed (S702 of FIG. 33). Thereby, since the probability variation is started, the probability variation period can be configured to elapse only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying. That is, the probability variation ends after the variation effect is performed for a predetermined period after the probability variation starts.

<Function and effect of technical idea 4>
For example, the ball launching unit 112a that launches a ball to the game board 13 has a failure, the nail on the game board 13 is clogged with a ball, and the nail on the game board 13 to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is Due to factors such as being tightened, it may be difficult or difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In these cases, when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 approaches the probability variation ending switch 707 (ball discharging portion 706), chances of lottery during probability variation decrease, so the game Cannot secure the profit of the person. According to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, unless the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability-changing rotating body 704 ends with a probability change. Since the switch 707 (ball discharging unit 706) is not approached and the chances of the lottery during the probability change are not reduced, the player's profit can be protected. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 when the special symbol is changing, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the time when the special symbol is variably displayed is added (totaled), The probability variable rotating body 704 may be configured to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the total time. With this configuration, it is possible to rotate a fixed amount of rotation with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) to start the probability variation, and then the probability variation rotating body. The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) causes the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 to rotate the ball retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation ends. The switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and the period until the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, a score (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the period of the probability change is given. After starting the probability variation, the sphere stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, immediately before the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is stopped (for example, 2 seconds), the probability variation period progress processing ( By referring to FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 is swung at an angle (the number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the probability variation period is changed according to the variation pattern. Add points to progress (hereinafter, "probability period progress points"). The “probability variation period progress score” is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach. When the total value of the “probability variation period progress points” becomes equal to or greater than the points (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the probability variation period, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. 704 is operated. Here, the rotation angle of the probability varying rotor 704 corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point” is ““the angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”÷(the number of points representing the probability variation period (50 points))”. Since it can be calculated, the rotation angle of the probability varying rotator 704 corresponding to one point of “probability variation period progress score” is 6 degrees. The probability variation rotator 704 is rotated by a different angle for each variation pattern each time the variation effect is produced. As a result, when the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the probability variation terminating switch 707 detects the ball entry. Then, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, after the probability variation is started, the probability variation period elapses for each variation pattern for a period different for each variation pattern.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is part of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, part of the ROM 202, and part of the variation process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201. The process is the same as that of the first embodiment, except that part of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 38) and part of the probability variation period progress process (FIG. 39) are different. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Probability variation period deduction memory 203r>
Various types of data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 34B shows various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

First, FIG. 34A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In addition to the data of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, it has a probability variation period deduction memory 203r.

The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is a memory for storing “probability variation period progress points”. The "probability variation period progress score" is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach.

In the probability variation period deduction memory 203r, 0 is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the variation effect is started by the MPU 201, the “probability variation period progress score” is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r in the variation start process (see FIG. 38). The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is for adding a value to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) immediately before the variation time of the variation effect started before (for example, 2 seconds ago). , To rotate the probability varying rotator 704. The probability variation period deduction memory 203r can rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 immediately before the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed. The rotation angle of the probability varying rotator 704 corresponding to one point of the value of the probability varying period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period progress point”) is 6 degrees.

Next, FIG. 34B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. In place of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a jackpot variation pattern table 202e is provided, and instead of the detachment variation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a detachment variation pattern. It has a table 202f.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202e is a table in which a “probable variation period progress score” is added to each variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c in the first embodiment.

The deviation pattern table for deviation 202f is a table in which “probability variation period progress score” is added to each fluctuation pattern of the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d in the first embodiment.

FIG. 35A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. The “probable variation period progress score” is added to the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. The "probability variation period progress points" are 2 points for each normal reach type, 3 points for each super reach type, and 5 points for each special reach type.

FIG. 35B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. The “probability variation period progress score” is added to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8D) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, there are two out-of-range variation pattern tables in the normal state and the probability variation, and a variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 8E). Although there are two, there is one variation pattern table for disconnection in the third embodiment. The “probability variation period progress score” is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach.

<Elapsed time from the start of the probability change and the total value of the “progress of the probability change period”>
Next, the operation of the probability altering compound 700 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation and the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”.

At t0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At t0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, points (50 points in this embodiment) representing the period of the probability change are given. From t0, super reach (60 seconds, 3 points) is started to be executed as the first fluctuating effect during probability change.

The time t1 is 58 seconds after the time t0, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t2. This is because the variation process (see FIG. 37) executes the probability variation period progressing process (see FIG. 39) 2 seconds before the variation time of the variation effect, and the probability variation rotating body 704 takes 2 seconds in the probability variation period progressing process. This is because it is rotated (see S3205 in FIG. 39). Note that, as described above, the angle corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress score” is 6 degrees.

t2 o'clock is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from t1 o'clock, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of the total number of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t2, the super reach variation effect is stopped, and short deviation (7 seconds, 1 point) is started as the next variation effect.

At t3 o'clock, 5 seconds elapses from t2 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the elapse of the fluctuation time, the probable variation rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probable variation rotor motor 704a. The probability varying rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability varying period progress point”, and finishes rotating by t4.

At t4 o'clock, 2 seconds have elapsed from t3 o'clock, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating from "angle A1" to an angle (24 degrees) corresponding to four points of the total value of "probability varying period progress points". It is in a state. At t4, the short deviation effect is stopped, and the long deviation (10 seconds, 1 point) is started as the next fluctuation effect.

At t5 o'clock, 8 seconds elapse from t4 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t6.

At t6, 2 seconds have elapsed from t5, and the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of the total number of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t6, the out-of-long variation effect is stopped, and the normal reach (30 seconds, 2 points) is started to be executed as the next variation effect.

At t7, 28 seconds has elapsed from t6, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (12 degrees) corresponding to two points of “probability variation period progress points”, and completes rotation by t8.

At t8 o'clock, 2 seconds have elapsed from t7 o'clock, and the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (42 degrees) corresponding to 7 points of the total value of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t8, the normal reach variation effect is stopped, and as the next variation effect, the special reach (90 seconds, 5 points) is started to be executed.

At t9 o'clock, 88 seconds elapse from t8 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of the “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t10.

t10 o'clock is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from t9 o'clock, and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotating from "angle A1" to an angle (72 degrees) corresponding to 12 points of the total value of "probability variation period progress points". It is in a state. At t10, the jackpot is determined by the change effect of the special reach, and then the jackpot game is started.

In FIG. 36, the case of a big hit during the probability change is explained, but when the big hit does not occur during the probability change, the total value of the “probability change period progress points” is a score representing the period of the probability change given at the start of the probability change (this implementation. Probability change continues until it becomes 50 points or more in the form).

<Variation processing>
The variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed. The variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation process in the third embodiment (FIG. 37) are the probabilistic variation period progress process (see FIG. 22 for the first embodiment, see FIG. 39 for the third embodiment). The first embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the execution timing of the above is different.

In the first embodiment, if it is not a big hit (S701 in FIG. 22: No), the probability variation period progress processing (S702 in FIG. 22) is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and if the changing time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is updated (S715). After that, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is 2 seconds before the change time elapses (S3001), and if it is before 2 seconds before the change time elapses (S3001: No), the present process To finish. On the other hand, if it is 2 seconds before the variation time elapses (S3001: Yes), the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 39) is executed (S3002), and this processing ends. As a result, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed. Note that the probability variation period progress processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment.

In contrast to the fluctuation start process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 23), the fluctuation start process of the third embodiment (FIG. 38) is added with the process of S3101 just before the end of the fluctuation start process. different. In the process of S3101, a point “probability variation period progress point” based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table (the jackpot variation pattern table 202e or the deviation variation pattern table 202f) is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r ( S3101). That is, with respect to the variation pattern, the values of the points set in the variable period deduction memory 203r are 1 point for short deviation, 1 point for long deviation, 2 points for various normal reach types, 3 points for various super reach types, and 3 types for special reach types. 5 points. Thereby, in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) executed immediately before the variation time of the variation effect, the probability variation period can be advanced according to the value set in the variable period deduction memory 203r.

<Probability period progress processing>
Next, the probability variation period progress processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the probability variation period progress processing (S3002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The probability variation period progressing process (S3002) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 37) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated to perform the probability variation. This is the process of advancing the period.

In the probability variation period progress processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on (S3201). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S3201: No), this processing ends. As a result, even if the probability variation period progress processing is executed other than during the probability variation, the processing of S3202 to S3208 is not executed. If it is determined that the probability variation in progress flag 203l is ON (S3201: Yes), the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether the value is equal to or more than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202), and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is determined. If it is not equal to or greater than the value of 203o (that is, less than) (S3202: No), the value corresponding to the probability variation period deduction memory 203r is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S3203). As a result, the processes of S3203 to S3206 can be executed only when the probability variation period should be advanced (S3202: No).

Here, the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the probability variation rotating body 704 to the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2”. Is set. In the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), the probability variation period memory 203o corresponds to 180 seconds (=360 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to 360 seconds in the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17). 17 is set (see S304 in Fig. 17). In the third embodiment, during the period in which the probability varying rotor 704 rotates from the state of "angle A1" to the state of "angle A2". The corresponding value, that is, the number of points representing the probability variation period is 50. Therefore, in the process of S3203, unlike the first embodiment, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p has “value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r÷ The value calculated by “the number of points representing the probability variation period (50 points)×the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (180000)” is added. For example, when the variation pattern is short deviation, the variation start in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r is changed. In the process, one point is set (see S3101 in Fig. 38.) Therefore, in the process of S3203, "the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p x 3600" is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p.

After the process of S3203, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not the value of the probability variation period memory 203o is greater than or equal to (S3204). If the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (that is, less than). (S3204: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY” corresponding to the value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period number of points”) (S3205). Here, the “angle AY” can be calculated by “value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r/(points representing the probability variation period (50 points))×(angle A1-A2 (300 degrees) of the probability variation rotating body 704)”. .. For example, when the variation pattern is out of bounds, one point is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r in the variation start process (see S3101 in FIG. 38). Therefore, in the processing of S3205, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY (value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r×6 degrees)”. In order to complete the rotation of the “angle AY” by 2 seconds after the fluctuation effect is stopped, the MPU 201 causes the probability variable rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variable rotor 704 to the probability variable rotor of the probability variable rotor 704. A predetermined command for rotating the motor 704a at “angle “AY”/2 degrees per second in a clockwise direction” is output. Thus, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation effect is stopped according to the variation pattern of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines that the value is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3204: Yes), the probability variation rotating body 704 is set to " The process is ended by rotating clockwise until the angle A2" (S3206). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. The discharged balls flow down the path 707a below the ball discharging unit 706, and are detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). With this detection as a trigger, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19).

In the process of S3202, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202: Yes), the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207), and the probability variation abnormality command is set ( (S3208), this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Function and effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that the probability varying rotor 704a stops rotating due to a failure of the probability varying rotor motor 704a or an illegal disconnection of a line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to stop, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a, Even if a fraudulent act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined in S3202 that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207). Since the probability change is forcibly ended, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Function and effect of technical idea 5>
According to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, a score (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the period of the probability change is given. After starting the probability variation, the sphere stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, just before the stop of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) (for example, 2 seconds), the probability variation period progress processing ( By referring to FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotating body 704 is swung at an angle (the number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect. As a result, the player who knows the rotation amount of the probability varying rotating body 704 corresponding to the variation effect, when the variation effect is visually recognized, how accurately the sphere retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 changes. It is possible to determine whether the end switch 707 (ball discharging unit 706) is approaching. That is, there is an effect that the end of the probability change can be predicted from the change effect.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to the third embodiment, it is inspected whether or not the probability altering object 700 is broken during the jackpot game (probability can be started. A configuration for determining whether or not) has been added.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a part of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, a switch reading process (FIGS. 41 and 42) executed by the MPU 201, and a variation process (FIG. 45). ) Is the same as the first embodiment except that a part of the processing of () and a part of the change start processing (FIG. 46) are different. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Probability change determination flag 203s>
Various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. In addition to the data in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is included.

The probability variation determination flag 203s is a flag that indicates whether to start a probability variation determination process that inspects whether the probability variation object 700 is out of order. This indicates that the probability variation determination process is started when the probability variation determination flag 203s is ON, and the probability variation determination process is not started when the probability variation determination flag 203s is OFF. The probability variation determination flag 203s is used to determine whether to start the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) by the MPU 201.

The probability variation determination flag 203s is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot described above or 4R probability variation jackpot) is determined (see FIG. 46), the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on, and the probability variation generation switch 703 can enter the ball during the jackpot game. In the probability variation determination start process (see FIG. 43), when the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) is started, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off.

<Switch reading process>
Next, the switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the switch reading process (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to mainly enter the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 that form the probability variation object 700. This is processing for detecting and executing processing according to the detection.

In the switch reading process (FIG. 41) of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined Yes in the process of S4001 (“A” in FIG. 41), the process of shifting to the process of S211 (“B” in FIG. 41), Is different from the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) of the first embodiment.

When the switch reading process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S4001). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is not a big hit (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S201. The processing of S201 to S211 is the same as the switch reading processing (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to S4002 (see “A” in FIG. 42). As a result, it is possible to execute a process for allowing the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 during the big hit game. In the processing of S4002, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002). Here, a ball entering the through switch 701 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag 203s is on to determine whether or not the electric tulip 702 should be opened. Yes (S4003). When it is determined that the probability variation determination flag 203s is ON (S4003: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (electrical accessory 702a is opened) (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. This allows the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag 203s is not on (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in the open state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball does not enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. .. If the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot described above) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 46) of the MPU 201, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by inserting the ball into the through switch 701 during the big hit game after the probability variation big hit is determined, and the ball enters the probability variation generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. Will be able to When it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S4002: No), the process proceeds to S4005.

Next, in the processing of S4005, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005). Here, a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S4006), and the probability change determination start process (S4007) is performed. After executing, the process proceeds to S4008. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. (For example, up to 4) Note that the probability changeable determination start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

Next, in the processing of S4008, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008). Here, the ball entering the probability change end switch 707 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has entered the probability variation end switch 707 (S4008: Yes), the probability variation determination end process (S4009) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. Note that the probability variation determination end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008: No), the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. In the processing of S211, other processing is executed (S211), the switch reading processing is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

<Probability change start processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43, the probability variation determination start processing (S4007) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination start processing (S4007). The probability variation determination start process (S4007) is performed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 41 and FIG. 42) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703. Is a process of starting a process of inspecting (determining whether or not probability variation can be started) whether or not the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game.

When the probability variation determination start processing is executed, first, the probability variation target object that is a counter that stores the number of balls entering the probability variation role object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). One is added to the entry counter 203n (S4101). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation determination flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S4102: No), the probability variation determination start processing ends and the process returns to the switch reading processing (see FIG. 42).

If the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103). Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4104), and a value corresponding to the probability variation determination scheduled period is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S4105). In the present embodiment, 15000 (=30 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period 30 seconds of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. The scheduled period of 30 seconds for the probability variation determination is a period during which the probability variation rotor 704 rotates from the state of the angle “A1” to the state of the angle “A2”.

Here, the processing of S4103 to S4105 is processing for starting the probability change possibility determination processing. If the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability variation determination flag 203s is off (S4103) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703. This is to execute the process of starting the probability changeable determination process only when the first ball is entered. That is, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first ball, the probability variation determination flag 203s is on, so that all the processes of S4101 to S4105 are executed. Next, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103), so the processes of S4101 and S4102 are executed, and the processes of S4103 to S4105 are performed. Is not executed. As a result, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change generation switch 703, the probability change possibility determination process can be started.

<Probability change end process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the probability variation determination end processing (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination end processing (S4009). The probability variation determination end process (S4009) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIGS. 41 and 42) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation end switch 707 is entered. Is a process of terminating the process of inspecting (determining whether or not probability variation can be started) whether or not the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game.

When the probability variation determination end processing is executed, first, the probability variation component entrance counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S4201), and the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on to schedule the probability variation start (S4202). Thus, thereafter, when the ball is thrown into the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened (see FIG. 41 ), so that the probability change occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state is set. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S4203). When the probability variation object entry counter 203n is determined to be 0 (S4203: Yes), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise to "angle A1" (S4204), and the probability variation determination end process is ended. , Return to the switch reading process. When the process of S4204 is executed, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704” is 300 degrees, in the process of S4204, the probability varying rotor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 is subjected to the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the process of S4204. Therefore, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” at the end of the jackpot game.

In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4203: No), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S4205). Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4206), a value corresponding to the probability variation determination scheduled period is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S4207), the probability variation determination end process is ended, and the switch reading process is performed. Return to. In the present embodiment, 15000 (=30 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period 30 seconds of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o.

Here, the processing of S4205 to S4207 is not processing for ending the probability variation determination processing, but processing for restarting the probability variation determination processing again according to the number of balls that entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703. .. The processes of S4205 to S4207 are executed when the probability variation generation switch 703 has a plurality of balls. When there are a plurality of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703, since the balls are retained in the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S4205), the ball that has been stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. One second after the execution of S4205 to S4207, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to start rotating clockwise by the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 45). The process of S4205 is the same as the process of S4204.

<Variation processing>
The variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. And the probability variation possibility determination process (see FIG. 47) that rotates the probability variation rotating body 704 and inspects whether the probability variation role object 700 is out of order during the big hit game (determines whether it is possible to start the probability variation). To be executed. The variation process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment and the variation process (see FIG. 33) in the fourth embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Is.

When the variation process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S701). When the big hit is not in progress (S701: No), the processes after S702 are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S701: Yes), the probability variation determination process (S4301) is executed, and this process ends. The probability changeable determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. As a result, only during the jackpot game, the probability variation possibility determination process for inspecting whether the probability variation role object 700 is out of order can be executed.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment.

Instead of the process of turning on the probability variation start schedule flag 203m of the variation start process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment (see S907 of FIG. 23), the variation start process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 46) is performed in S4401. The difference is that processing is added. The process of S4401 is executed in the jackpot lottery process of S901, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S901: Yes), and when it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot in the process of S906 (S906: Yes). In the process of S4401, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on (S4401). As a result, when the ball is inserted into the through switch 701 during the big hit game, the electric tulip 702 is opened. Therefore, based on the ball entry into the probability variation generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702, it is inspected whether the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determination whether probability variation can be started). can do.

<Probability change determination process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47, the probability variation determination process (S4301) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination process (S4301). The probability variation determination process (S4301) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 45) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and rotates the probability variation rotating body 704, This is a process of inspecting whether the probability variation object 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determining whether probability variation can be started).

The probability variation determination process (S4301) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), when the jackpot is being hit in the variation process (see FIG. 45) (S701: Yes). It is a process that is performed.

When the probability variation possibility determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation accessory entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S4501). If the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is 0 (S4501: Yes), this processing ends. Thereby, even if the probability variation possibility determination process is executed when the sphere does not exist inside the probability variation combination object 700 (between the probability variation generation switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the processes of S4502 to S4507 are not executed. When it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4501: No), 1 is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4502).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503). When it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S4503: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is “angle A2” or more (S4504).

Here, the probability variation rotator 704 is "angle A2 or more" includes the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge part 706 overlap, and further rotates clockwise from the "angle A2". This is the case. In the process of S4504, the MPU 201 obtains the current angle of the probability varying rotor motor 704a from (the motor driver of) the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 to determine whether the probability varying rotor 704 is equal to or greater than "angle A2". ..

When it is determined that the probability varying rotator 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is not equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (that is, less than the “angle A2”) (S4504: No), the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by the “angle AZ”. It is rotated (S4505).

Here, since the processing of S4501 to S4505 is processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) during the jackpot game, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 2 One is added every millisecond. In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period counter 203p is 500 or more, and the value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, for one second after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, the process (S4505) of rotating the probability variation rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle by “angle AZ” is not executed. During the jackpot game, the process in which the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 is two processes, a probability variation determination start process (see FIG. 43) and a probability variation determination end process (see FIG. 44). After the probability variation determination start processing (see FIG. 43) is executed, that is, for one second after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering, the probability variation rotating body 704 stops in the state of “angle A1”. ing. In addition, after the probability variation determination end process (see FIG. 44), that is, when a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of one ball, When a sphere is present inside the probability-change object 700 (between the probability-change occurrence switch 703 and the probability-change end switch 707), the probability-change rotor 704 is rotated counterclockwise for 0.5 seconds after the detection of the incoming ball. The rotation changes from "angle A2" to "angle A1", and the probability variation rotating body 704 is stopped in the state of "angle A1" for 0.5 seconds thereafter. As a result, the probability variation possibility determination process can be executed again according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703.

Further, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this processing is ended. The probability variation rotating body 704 being in the “angle A2” state means that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 enters the state of “angle A2”, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to rotate the probability varying rotator 704 further clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S4505, this processing is completed. As a result, the probability variation rotating body 704 maintains the state of “angle A2” until the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering.

Further, by the processing of S4505, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AZ”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped (scheduled period of probability variation determination) is 30 seconds. 15000 corresponding to this 30 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Since the process of S4505 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the "angle AZ" is "the angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotating body 704". /(Value of probability variation period memory 203o)". In this embodiment, the “angle AZ” is 0.02 (=300/15000) degrees.

When the processing of S4505 is executed, next, in order to determine whether the scheduled period of the probability variation determination is exceeded, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not it is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506). ). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: No), this processing ends.

If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: Yes), the probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507), and this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Function and effect of technical idea 7>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the big hit (S4001: Yes in FIG. 41 ), even if the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the probability variation does not start (the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17 ). The probability variation determination start processing (see FIG. 43) is executed without executing the above). During the jackpot game, enter the probability variation generation switch 703 and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is transferred to the probability variation end switch 707 (ball discharging portion 706) by the probability variation determination processing (see FIG. 47). Lead. If the main controller 110 determines that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period of the probability variation determination from the probability variation period memory 203o and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, the probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507 in FIG. 47). .. The display control device 114 that has received the probability variation abnormality command displays "probability variation abnormality" on the third symbol display device 81 to notify it. As a result, during the jackpot game, if the operation of the probability variation auditors 700 (particularly, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a or the probability variation ending switch 707) is normal, the notification of "probability variation abnormality" is not issued. Therefore, when the information displayed as “probability variation abnormality” is notified, the player or the store clerk at the game hall who visually recognizes the notification displayed as “probability variation abnormality” causes the probability variation target object 700 (in particular, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a or There is an effect that it can be known that the probability variation end switch 707) is out of order.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. ..

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a small hit other than the hit is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and if the small hit is won during the probability change, the variation pattern at the time of the miss is selected by lottery. For this reason, a configuration is added for executing the process of switching the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, some configurations of the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), the start winning process (FIG. 20, S110), and the variation start process (FIG. 23, S709) executed by the MPU 201 are the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50) and the starting prize process (FIG. 51, S110) and fluctuation start processing (FIG. 52, S709). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment, some of the configurations of the RAM 203 and the R0M202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from those of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48A, in the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment, a migration number counter 203t is added to the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 7A). Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When a small hit is won in the probability variation state, the shift number counter 203t selects a particular variation pattern table (for deviation (probability variation) variation patterns A to E) from the variation pattern table of the deviation. This is a storage area in which the number of transitions set in the fluctuation pattern table is set. When a specific variation pattern table is selected, the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed up to the number of times of transition set in the variation pattern, and the normal variation pattern table (displacement (probability variation) variation pattern table) is displayed. Is set.

The transfer number counter 203t is set with the transfer number set in the set transfer destination table in the process of S945 of the small hit process (S929 of FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, by the process of S932 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 52, S709), the special symbol is updated by subtracting one each time the fluctuation starts (whether or not the win/fail judgment is lost).

In this way, when the small win is won, the variation pattern table in the case of a deviation is switched and set by the lottery, but when the number of transitions of the set variation pattern table elapses, it is switched to the normal variation pattern table. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting how many times the number of transitions is set in the table. Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period (the period until the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch) is the probability variation game state, so the variation pattern table selected when the small hit is won is extremely varied. A variation pattern with a short time is configured to be easily selected, and more lottery games can be played during a certain variation. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the variation pattern table in which a larger number of transitions is set is selected.

When the content of the RAM 203 is initialized, the transition number counter 203t is initialized to 0 which is an initial value. On the other hand, normally, the value of the transition number counter 203t is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the value is returned to the value when the power is turned off and set.

As shown in FIG. 48B, the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B) in the deviation pattern table for deviation 202g, the switching selection table 202h, and the small selection table 202h. Each winning random number table 202i is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern table 202g differs from the deviation variation table 202d in the first embodiment in that deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E (see FIG. 49A) are added. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are variation pattern tables selected by lottery when the small hit is won when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability variation state). In addition, if the game state is probable that the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is further selected and if the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are selected, if a small hit is won, it is selected by lottery. It is a fluctuation pattern table that is.

Further, the number of shifts is set in each of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E as shown in FIG. When the variation of the special symbol is executed up to the number of times set to the number of transitions when each variation pattern table is selected, the number of transitions is a normal variation pattern table, which is a deviation (probability variation) for deviation. The pattern table (FIG. 9E) is forcibly moved and set.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if the small hit is won, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift to the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table E. Is configured to.

Here, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is set to have the number of transitions of 500, which is larger than the number of transitions of other variation pattern tables. Further, the outlying (probable variation) variation pattern table E is a case where a small win is won (winning probability 28/900) when any of the outlying (probably variation) variation pattern tables A to D is set. Only when the value of the switching counter CK1 acquired in this case is 399 (selection probability 1/400), the variation pattern table is extremely hard to be selected.

However, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is set to 1/30, and the period of the high-probability state is set to at least 360 seconds, so that the longest variation time of the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E is set. Even if all are selected, it is possible to change the special symbol 72 times, and in fact, since it is possible to change more than that, it is possible to increase the possibility that the jackpot is drawn during the period of the high probability state. ..

In this way, by shifting to the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables A to D, the player can easily select an extremely short fluctuation pattern of deviation, and more lottery can be executed in a short time. You can raise expectations. Further, when the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if a small hit is won, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. Can play the game with the expectation of shifting to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the high probability state more, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small win is won when the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, only a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. With this configuration, when a variation pattern table with a large number of transitions has been selected, a variation pattern table with a small number of transitions is selected, and a problem that the number of transitions is substantially reduced can be prevented. did. Further, when the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is selected, even if the small hit is won, the change selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of shifts is changed to another fluctuation pattern table before the number of shifts reaches 0, even though the big hit is not made.

In the present embodiment, when any of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E is set, when the jackpot is hit or the high-probability game state ends, the number of transitions remains. Also, it is configured so that a variation pattern table corresponding to the next gaming state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E are hit big, after the jackpot game, if it is in a high probability state, the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table (FIG. 9). (E)), if it is a low probability game state, it is configured to set the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, but not limited to this, when a higher probability game state is maintained after the jackpot game For example, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E that have been set may be set as they are, and the game may be executed with the remaining number of transitions. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player.

As described above, the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), if a small hit is won when the high-probability gaming state is set, the set variation pattern table is changed to another variation pattern table. It is a selection table for determining whether to transfer. As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the small hit is won, the selected variation pattern table is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (see FIG. 9(e)), and a deviation variation pattern table. The value of the switching counter CK1 is set for the change pattern table of the transfer destination separately from the case where A to D are selected.

When the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table (FIG. 9E) is set and the small hit is won, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are displayed as shown in FIG. 49B. The hits of the switching counter CK1 are assigned and set. When a value other than the set value of the switching counter CK1 is acquired, the transition of the fluctuation pattern table is not performed. The number of transitions (10 to 40 times) is set in each of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D, and when any variation pattern table is selected, it is set in the selected variation pattern table. The number of transitions is set in the transition counter 203t.

As shown in FIG. 49B, if any of the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D is set and the small hit is won, if the acquired switching counter CK1 is 399. The determination value of the switching counter CK1 is set so that the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is set.

Thus, according to the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), during the high-probability game state, the normal deviation (probability change) variation pattern table in which the number of transitions is not set (FIG. 9(e)) ) Is set, by winning the small hit, a transition lottery to the outlying (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, so that the player has a high probability game. It is possible to play a game while expecting to win a small hit in the state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a determination result that expects the player to win in addition to the jackpot, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

If any of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D is set, if the small hit is won, the deviation (probability variation) is more advantageous to the player than the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D. ) Since the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the fluctuation pattern table E is executed based on the switching selection table 202h, the player can set a small value even when the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables A to D are set. You can play games with the expectation of winning the prize.

The small hit random number table 202i (see FIG. 49(c)) is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first small random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit is set for each gaming state. In the small hit random number table 202i, the small hit determination value is not set in the low probability state. As a result, in the low probability state, the small win is not won. Further, in the high probability state, the determination value of "0 to 27" is set as the winning determination value of the small hit. Since this determination value is set to a value other than the determination value that is determined to be the big hit, the determination value for the small hit is set to the determination value that is determined to be out. This makes it possible to set a small hit without reducing the big hit probability in the high probability state.

When the small hit is won, a symbol (341 in the present embodiment) indicating the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the LED is also turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in a display mode indicating the small hit. It After that, the small hit game is executed in which the specific winning opening 65a is executed for two rounds in the opening time of 3 seconds. As for the gaming state after the small hit game, the gaming state at the time of small hit winning is maintained (when the high probability state ends after the small hit winning, the low probability state is set).

Next, the control processing in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control processing in the fifth embodiment, the timer interrupt control processing, the fluctuation start processing, and the start winning processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from those in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50) according to the fifth embodiment is updated by adding 1 to the value of the switching counter CK1 in the process of S120 with respect to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) according to the first embodiment. Processing has been added. The switching counter CK1 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 299, and is a counter for determining whether to shift the fluctuation pattern table when a small hit is won in the high probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a fluctuation start process (S709), which is one process in the fluctuation process (FIG. 21, S109) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this variation start processing (S709).

In the variation start process (FIG. 51, S709), first, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result is a win (big hit) (S921). When it is determined that the hit/no hit determination result is a hit (S921: Yes), the setting necessary for the big hit game is set (S922). Here, the setting required for the jackpot game is set to the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the selected jackpot type, the maximum number of prizes per round to the specific winning opening 65a, the maximum time of one round, and the like. ..

The display mode at the time of a big hit (the display mode of the first symbol display device 37) is set (S923). It is determined whether or not the selected jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (S924). When it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S924: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S924: No), the process of S926 is executed.

In the process of S926, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 based on the set fluctuation pattern table (S926). A stop type command is set (S927), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S921, when it is determined that the hit/miss determination result is out (S921: No), it is determined whether or not the hit/fail determination result is a small hit (S928). When it is determined that it is a small hit (S928: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S929).

Here, the small hitting process (S929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this small hitting process (S929).

It is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on, that is, whether the probability variation is in progress (during high probability state) (S941). If it is determined that the during-probability change flag 203l is on (S941: Yes), the variation pattern table is selected from the switching selection table 202h (FIG. 49(c)) based on the acquired value of the switching counter CK1. A lottery is executed (S942). Here, based on the currently set fluctuation pattern table and the value of the switching counter CK1, the selection lottery is performed for the fluctuation pattern table to which the switching selection table 202h is transferred. By this lottery, when the value of the switching counter CK1 for which the transfer destination fluctuation pattern table is not set is acquired, the transfer of the fluctuation pattern table is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the change pattern table of the transfer destination is determined by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small hit is won, the change pattern table is changed to a predetermined change pattern table. You may.

In the process of S943, it is determined whether or not the shift of the fluctuation pattern table is determined in the process of S942. When it is determined that the change of the fluctuation pattern table has been decided (S943: Yes), the change pattern table of the decided change destination is set (S944). The transfer count set in the set fluctuation pattern table is set in the transfer count counter 203t (S945). The small hit game is set (S946). As the setting of the small hit game, the number of rounds (two rounds in this embodiment), the maximum number of winnings to a specific winning opening (10 in this embodiment), the maximum time for one round (3 in this embodiment) Seconds) etc. are set. The display mode at the time of a small hit (lighting mode of the LED displayed on the first symbol display device 37) is set (S947).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S941 that the during-probability change flag 203l is off (S941: No), if it is determined that the table transfer is not determined in the process of S943 (S943: No), S946. , S947 is executed and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a start winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S110). The start winning process (FIG. 53, S110) in the fifth embodiment is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 20, S110) in the first embodiment in that the process of S604 is changed to S620 and the process of S608 is changed to S630. ing.

In the processing of S620 and S630, in addition to the processing of S604 and S608, processing of acquiring the switching counter CK1 and storing it in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is added. ing. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to switch the fluctuation pattern table by lottery based on the fact that the small winning is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times, every time the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, the lottery for switching the fluctuation pattern tables may be executed, or the fluctuation pattern tables may be switched in a predetermined order.

For example, after the high-probability game state is set, a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected is set up to a predetermined number of times, and thereafter, a fluctuation pattern table with a long fluctuation time is easily selected. It may be set to switch to. By setting in this way, while performing lottery for more special symbols, in a state where the high probability state is low, a variation mode with a high expectation for the jackpot, which is a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, is set. You can enjoy.

On the contrary, after the high-probability game state is set, up to a predetermined number of times, a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected is set, and thereafter, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected. You may set so that it may switch to a fluctuation pattern table. With this configuration, even if the remaining period of the high-probability state is short, more lots of special symbols can be drawn, and the expectation for a jackpot can be sustained for a longer time. ..

<Correspondence between Description of Embodiment and Description of Claims>
The "first entrance switch or the second entrance switch" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "detection means" described in the claims. The “first symbol or the third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims. The “various normal reach, various super reach, and special reach” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “first dynamic display” described in the claims. "Short deviation, long deviation" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "second dynamic display" described in the claims. The “big hit probability in the low probability state” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first probability” described in the claims. The “high probability jackpot probability in the high probability state” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second probability” described in the claims.

<Modification>
Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment is exchanged, thereby The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values mentioned in the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

For example, in the above-described first embodiment, the time from the state of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state of the “angle A1” to the state of the “angle A2” (a period shorter by 1 second than the “longest period of the probability varying”) is 360 seconds. Although the case has been described, it may be longer or shorter than 360 seconds (for example, 100 seconds, 600 seconds, etc.). Further, the time taken for the probability variable rotating body 704 to change from the “angle A1” state to the “angle A2” state is set to 360 seconds, which is a fixed value. This time is associated with the value of the first type counter C2. You may comprise. For example, 100 seconds may be associated with the value "0-24" of the first hit type counter C2, or 600 seconds may be associated with the value "50-99" of the first hit type counter C2. You may attach it. In this case, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects entry of a sphere, the probability variation rotator 704 sets the “angle A1” according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 at the time of shifting to the high probability state. The time from the state of 1 to the state of “angle A2” is determined. As a result, the player can be grieved according to the length of the probability change period determined at the start of the probability change. Therefore, the range of game play provided to the player can be expanded.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, in the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise (every time, the same every 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt processing). The case where the “angle AX” rotation, which is an angle, is described, but it is not necessary to rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times (twice, The probability varying rotator 704 may be rotated each time it is executed (three times or the like). As a result, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case where the probability variable rotating body 704 is rotated every time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Moreover, in the said 1st-4th embodiment, although the definite variation object 700 which has the definite variation rotary body 704 was demonstrated as an accessory which displays the remaining time of a definite variation, the definite variation is the accessory which does not have the probability variation rotation body 704. The remaining time may be displayed. For example, the probability variation role object 700 is a blocking member that blocks a ball, which has been detected by the probability variation generation switch 703, which is the trigger for the probability variation start, of the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707, which is the trigger for the probability variation end. Good. The ball may be retained in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member may be opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied (elapse of a predetermined time, etc.) and guided to the probability change end switch 707.

Further, for example, the probability variation object 700 may be configured by a slope on which a ball rolls, and the probability variation end switch 707 may be provided at the tip of the ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703 and flowing down the slope. It is to be noted that, in the probability variation role object 700, a period in which a ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703 is guided to the probability variation end switch 707 (a period shorter by 1 second than the “maximum probability variation period”) depends on the number of fluctuation effects. Instead, it suffices that the probability variation ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the probability variation started.

Moreover, in the said 1st-5th embodiment, although the probability variation|correction compound 700 which has the probability variation rotation body 704 was demonstrated as a character which displays the remaining time of probability variation, the character itself does not display the remaining time of probability variation. Alternatively, the accessory itself may not be visually recognized by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time of the probability change. When the remaining time of the probability variation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, when the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) is started, the probability variation start command indicating that the probability variation is started is The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the display control device 114. This probability change start command includes information on the "maximum probability change period". The display control device 114 that has received the probability variation start command determines the remaining time of the probability variation on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the "probability variation longest period" of the probability variation start command and the elapsed time from when the probability variation start command is received. It should be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize the decrease in the remaining time of the probability change.

In addition, in the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the “15R normal jackpot” is won, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and after a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a time saving state. Although the case has been described, the definite odd object 700 may be configured to be in a shortened state for a predetermined time. This makes it possible to end the time saving state not only in the probability variation period but also in the time saving period after the time saving state is started and after a predetermined period elapses.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be double or triple according to the number of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703. The processing according to the number of balls entered in 703 is not limited to this, and when there are two or more balls entered in the probability variation generation switch 703, for example, before the probability variation starts, Two or more balls may be discharged from the ball discharging unit 706 so that only one ball is present inside the object 700. Specifically, during the 1 second, until the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 1, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves back and forth between the "angle A1" state and the "angle A2" state. It is configured to control the rotating body motor 704a. Further, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which only one ball enters the probability change generation switch 703. Specifically, immediately above the probability change generation switch 703, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked is provided. In the state where the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked, a route for guiding the blocked ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. Then, when a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 allows the ball on the path 703a to pass through, and then blocks the ball on the path 703a for 10 seconds, for example.

In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the probability variable rotating body 704 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle (by a predetermined angle in a predetermined cycle), but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be smoothly rotated at a predetermined speed. You may comprise. With this configuration, the player can be informed easily that the remaining period of the probability variation period is decreasing.

In addition, in the first to fifth embodiments, if the probability variation rotating body 704 does not rotate by a predetermined angle or more even after the probability variation period elapses for a predetermined period (set maximum period) or more, fraud or malfunction occurs. Although it is configured to forcibly shift from the high-probability state to the normal state, it is not limited to this, and when the probability variation rotating body 704 is controlled to rotate, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves. When an angle is discriminated and a deviation occurs between the control and the actual angle (position), a notification mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an alarm sound is emitted, a signal is output to a hall computer, etc. Unauthorized processing may be executed. Furthermore, the fraud processing may be configured to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state. Alternatively, the high probability state may be temporarily transited to the normal probability state, and control may be performed so as to restore the high probability state when the power is turned on again by the store clerk. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being given to the player even when the probability varying rotating body 740 is structurally bitten and does not rotate, or when the game ball is bitten.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, Display data table is prepared for each element such as, "Variation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and the final display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded in advance from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 expands the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image controller 237 outputs the image information to the frame buffer where the drawn image should be expanded and the third symbol display device 81 every time the image information for one frame is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the display data table defines the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time in correspondence with the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit has been described. The display content is not limited to the above, and any display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since one frame image is displayed every time, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visually recognized by the player when the fluctuation effect is executed has been described. Then, even if all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible level and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Good.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag. Then, the display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, the voice data is read from the voice data storage area 222a, and the reproduced voice is reproduced. It may be set in the data storage area 223d.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning of the first entrance 64, the winning of the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are respectively maximum. Although it is configured to be held up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). .. In addition, in the part of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the prize in the second ball entrance 640 are You may make it display in the form (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) which is different for the number of reserved balls by the number or the area divided into four, and is displayed separately from the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided and the number of retained balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variation effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to horizontally scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes a display effect that is displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

Of course, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined.

<Concepts of various inventions>
The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Informs the probability variation period according to the period during which the game ball moves to the end switch)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the win/fail judgment means In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state whose probability of being determined to be higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set Of the normal condition based on the setting condition determining means that determines whether the setting condition that is satisfied after the predetermined period of time is satisfied, and that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. A gaming machine A1 having a state switching setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine A1, the determination is executed by the win/loss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display unit, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. A special state is set by the state setting means on the basis of the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determining means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state. The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, after the predetermined period has elapsed since the privilege game state was set by the state setting means, if the setting condition is satisfied, the state is switched to the normal state, so that the special state can be set at least for the predetermined period. it can. Therefore, the player can at least enjoy the special state for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. A moving unit that moves the first position to the second position while being held by the holding unit, and a second detection that detects the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving unit. Means and the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means sets the second state. A gaming machine A2, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game sphere detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game sphere is held at the first position by the holding means. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the first detecting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Therefore, the period from being held by the holding means to being detected by the second detection means is a period in which the special state is set, and there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine A2, the detected number storage means for storing the number of game balls detected by the first detection means, and the game ball detected by the second detection means for the number stored in the detected number storage means. Update means for subtracting and updating based on, and the state switching setting means detects the game sphere by the second detecting means, and the number stored in the detected number storage means by the updating means is When it is updated to 0, the gaming machine A3 is switched to the special state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls detected by the first detecting means is stored in the detected number storage means. The number stored in the detected number storage means is subtracted based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the second detection means, and is updated by the updating means. When the game ball is detected by the second detection means and the number stored in the detected number storage means is updated by the updating means to become 0, the state switching setting means switches to the special state. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the first detection means, it becomes possible to set a long period in which the special state is set, and the player is made to detect many game balls by the first detection means. You can expect to play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A3 has a ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, and a guide means for guiding the game ball entering the ball entrance to the holding means, and the first detection means is the entrance In order to detect a game ball that has entered the ball opening, the holding means has a holding portion capable of holding one game ball, and when the holding portion holds the game ball, A game machine A4, characterized in that, when a game ball enters the ball opening, the entered game ball is stored in the guiding part until it is held in the holding part.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter is guided to the holding means by the guide means. The game ball that has entered the ball entrance is detected by the first detection means. When a game ball is held by the holding part of the holding means and the game ball is held in the holding part, if the game ball enters the ball entrance, the entered game ball is held in the holding part. Until it is stored, it is stored by the guiding part. As a result, the game balls detected by the first detection means can be guided to the holding portion in order. Therefore, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball detected by the first detection means to the holding portion, and it is possible to suppress an inconvenience that impairs the profit of the player.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the dynamic display time determining means determines one dynamic display time from the dynamic display time group set by a plurality of dynamic display times, and the result of the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it is easy to determine a long dynamic display time when it is determined based on the above, and when it is determined that the result of the determination is the determination result indicated by the specific identification information.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, one dynamic display time is determined from the dynamic display time group set by a plurality of dynamic display times by the dynamic display time determination means based on the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means. When it is determined that the hit determination result is the determination result indicated by the specific identification information, the long dynamic display time is easily determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Accordingly, when the identification information is dynamically displayed for a long dynamic display time, the player can be expected to display the specific identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display time and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic B group> (Rotate the rotating accessory only during the period of fluctuation of the design)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/no judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the display time, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the award/failure determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether or not a setting condition is satisfied after a total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed after the state is set, and the setting thereof. A gaming machine B1 having a state switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the condition determining means determining that the setting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B1, the win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, it is determined by the setting condition determination means whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means is satisfied. It The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined time and then set by switching from the special state to the normal state, so that the setting of the special state can be maintained while the player is not playing the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the profit of the player is impaired while the player is not playing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her profits and being less motivated and tired of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. Moving means for moving the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and the moving means for moving the game ball while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. It has movement control means for controlling and second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, and the state setting means has the first detection. The special condition is set on the basis of the game ball being detected by the means, and the setting condition determining means is based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means on the basis of the setting condition. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that it is determined that

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. While the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, the movement control means controls the movement means to move the game ball. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, it is judged by the setting condition judging means that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the special state can be set in the period in which the game ball is moved. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine B2, based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, an acquisition unit that acquires the determination information that is determined by the determination unit and the determination information that is acquired by the acquisition unit are held until the determination condition is satisfied. With a storage means capable of storing as information, the movement control means, when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, if the holding information is stored in the storage means, A gaming machine B3, which controls to continue the movement of the game ball by the moving means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, the acquisition information acquires the determination information which is determined by the determination unit. The determination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored as pending information until the determination condition is satisfied by the storage unit. When the suspension display of the identification information is stopped when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the movement control means controls so that the movement of the game ball by the movement means continues. Therefore, when the hold information is stored, the movement control means controls the movement of the game ball to be continued, so that it is not necessary to perform the processing for stopping the movement means, and the control processing is simplified. There is an effect that can be done.

The gaming machine B4 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, wherein the moving means moves the gaming ball from the first position to the second position at a constant speed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game ball is moved by the moving means at a constant speed from the first position to the second position, so that the special state is set at a certain time. The effect is that it can be easily controlled.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the moving means moves the first position to the second position by a predetermined movement amount at a predetermined cycle. ..

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is moved by the moving means from the first position to the second position at a predetermined moving amount in a predetermined cycle, so that it is special. The effect is that the state can be easily controlled for a certain period of time.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the win/loss determination means executes a win/loss determination based on a probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state set when the determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the win/fail determination is based on the probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state set when the determination condition is satisfied. Since it is executed by the means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by expecting that the determination condition is satisfied during the special state so that the game is played.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, after the special state is set, based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is started on the display means, the total time of the dynamic display time is stored. A game machine B7 having a time storage means, wherein the movement control means controls the movement means in accordance with the total time stored in the time storage means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the total time of the dynamic display time is stored in the time storage means based on the start of the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means after the special state is set. The movement means is controlled by the movement control means according to the total time stored in the time storage means.

Thereby, the moving means can be configured to move the game ball when the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the player takes a break during the special state of the game, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage from occurring.

In the gaming machine B7, the value stored in the time storage means is set to an initial value based on the special state being set by the state switching setting means or the normal state being set. A game machine B8 having an initialization means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the special state is set by the state switching setting means, or the normal state is set, and is stored in the time storage means. Since the value is set to the initial value by the initialization means, there is an effect that the movement control means can easily perform the control when the special state is set.

<Characteristic C group> (Countermeasure against fraud, if abnormal change does not end even after a lapse of a predetermined period, error notification)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the hit/miss determining means In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state whose probability of being determined to be higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set Of the normal condition based on the setting condition determining means that determines whether the setting condition that is satisfied after the predetermined period of time is satisfied, and that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. A state switching setting means for setting, a period determining means for determining the period set in the special state based on the setting of the special state, and a period longer than the predetermined period by the period determining means. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having an abnormality processing unit that determines that the abnormal condition is satisfied when the above condition is satisfied and executes a predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination is executed by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The normal state is set based on the fact that the setting condition is determined by the setting condition determining means. Based on the setting of the special state, the period determining means determines the period set in the special state. When the period determining unit determines that the abnormal condition is satisfied when the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined abnormality process is executed by the abnormality processing unit. This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the game shop.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as a predetermined abnormal process, so by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state, an illegal special There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the state continues.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game held by the holding means. A moving means for moving the ball from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and a moving means for moving the ball to the second position after detecting the moved game ball 2 detecting means, the state setting means is for setting the special state based on the game ball is detected by the first detecting means, the setting condition determining means, A gaming machine C3, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine C3 has a movement amount determination means for determining whether the period determined by the period determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values, and the abnormality processing means moves the movement. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that the predetermined abnormal processing is executed on the basis that the quantity judging means judges that the value is out of the normal value.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3. That is, the movement amount determination means determines whether the period determined by the period determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values. Based on the determination result that the value is out of the normal value, the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be discriminated at an early stage.

<Feature D group> (Prevention of fraud (type that moves only during dynamic display))
On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. By a dynamic display time determining means for determining a display time, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the hit/miss determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed after the state is set, and the setting thereof are set. On the basis that the condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied, the state switching setting means for setting the normal state and the special state are set, and then the identification information is dynamically displayed. On the basis of this, the time discriminating means for discriminating the total time of the dynamic display time in the special state, and the abnormal condition is established when the time discriminating means discriminates that the predetermined time or more has elapsed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having an abnormality processing means for determining that there is an abnormality and executing a predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine D1, the win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, it is determined by the setting condition determination means whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means is satisfied. It The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. After the special state is set, the total time of the dynamic display times during the special state is determined by the time determining means based on the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. When it is determined by the time determination means that the predetermined time or more has elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal condition is satisfied, and the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the game shop.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormal processing, so by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state, an illegal special There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the state continues.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game held by the holding means. A moving means for moving the sphere from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and a game sphere moved by the moving means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The movement setting means for controlling the movement means, and the second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, and the state setting means , The special state is set based on the game ball being detected by the first detecting means, and the setting condition determining means is based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means. The game machine D3 is characterized by determining that the setting condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, the movement means is controlled by the movement control means so that the game ball is moved by the movement means. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D3 has a movement amount determination means for determining whether the total time determined by the time determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values, and the abnormality processing means, A gaming machine D4, characterized in that the predetermined abnormal processing is executed on the basis that the movement amount judging means judges that the value is out of the normal value.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the movement amount determination means determines whether the total time determined by the time determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values. Based on the determination result that the result is outside the normal value, the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be discriminated at an early stage.

<Characteristic E group> (Switching table of variable time depending on small hit)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. Dynamic display time determining means for determining time, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display time groups configured by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and storage thereof Group type changing means for changing the dynamic display time group whose dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means based on establishment of a change condition from among the dynamic display time groups stored in the means. And, when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the probability that the hit/damage determination means determines that the hit is a normal state. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state set higher than a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, in the display means after the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether a setting condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. On the basis of the fact that the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means has a state switching setting means for setting the normal state, the dynamic display time shorter than other dynamic display time group. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a short dynamic display time group which is set easily is set.

According to the gaming machine E1, the determination is executed by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The identification information indicating the result of the judgment is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A plurality of dynamic display time groups configured by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determination means are stored in the storage means. The dynamic display time group whose dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means is changed by the group type changing means from the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the change condition. To be done. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means elapses for a predetermined time. The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. A short dynamic display time group that is set so that the dynamic display time shorter than the other dynamic display time groups is easily determined is set in the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means. Thus, by setting the short dynamic display time group, the identification information can be dynamically displayed many times during the special state, and the game can be efficiently played. Therefore, in a special state, the expectation for a jackpot can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

In the gaming machine E1, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detecting means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. A moving unit that moves the first position to the second position while being held by the holding unit, and a second detection that detects the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving unit. Means and the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means sets the second state. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detecting means.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the group type changing means is configured to be able to select the short dynamic display time group when the changing condition is satisfied when the special state is set. Characteristic gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the special state is set, the short dynamic display time group is selected when the change condition is satisfied by the group type changing means. It is possible to increase the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed during the period when the state is set, and it is possible to efficiently play the game in the special state.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is set to be easily selected by the group type changing means in the special state than in the normal state. A gaming machine E4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is selected by the group type changing means in the special state rather than in the normal state. Since the setting is made easy, there is an effect that the player can expect the short dynamic display time group to be selected when the special state is set so that the player can play the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the group type changing means is predetermined based on that the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after changing to the short dynamic display time group. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being changed to another dynamic display time group.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after being changed to the short dynamic display time group. Since the group type changing means changes the selected dynamic display time group to another dynamic display time group, it is possible to suppress an excessively short dynamic display time from being selected.

<Feature F group> (Modification M)
Detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and based on the detection of the entering of the game ball by the detecting means, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player. At the same time, the control means for performing control based on the lottery result, the dynamic display determination means for determining the dynamic display of the identification information based on the lottery result of the lottery by the control means, and the dynamic display determination means are determined. The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the period corresponding to the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery when the game ball enters To a high probability start area that triggers a second probability that is higher than the first probability, and a start area detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, and the start area detection means for the high probability start area When it is detected that the player has entered the ball, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the second probability, and the high probability starting means, and the high probability starting means wins the special game state in the lottery. After the predetermined probability has been set as the second probability, a high probability end means for setting the first probability to be the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery after a predetermined period, and the dynamic display determination means. Is for determining at least a first dynamic display and a second dynamic display as the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined. The execution period is longer in the first dynamic display than in the second dynamic display, and the first dynamic display is executed in the dynamic display execution means compared to the case where the second dynamic display is executed. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is more likely that the special game state has been won in the lottery when the target display is executed.

According to the gaming machine F1, the control means performs a lottery on whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball entering the specific area by the detecting means. Based on the result of the lottery, the dynamic display determination means determines the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means moves the identification information during the period corresponding to the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display determination means. Execute the static display. The high-probability start means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the second probability when the start area detection means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability start area (high probability state). ). On the other hand, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the second probability by the high-probability starting means, and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability after a predetermined period. Yes (end high probability state). The dynamic display determination means determines at least the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display as the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display has a longer period of execution of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means than the second dynamic display, and there is a high possibility that the special game state is won in the lottery. Thus, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery to the second probability by the high-probability starting means, and then the first probability of the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery after a predetermined period. Therefore, it is highly possible that the special game state is won in the lottery, and even if the first dynamic display is long in which the dynamic display is executed for a long period, the dynamic display period is high. The duration of the stochastic state does not increase. For example, in the high probability state, without transition to the special game state, there is a high probability that the special game state was won in the lottery, and the dynamic display is executed multiple times for a long period of time. If the period of the high-probability state is simply increased, the game becomes monotonous and the player may feel uncomfortable. According to the present invention, the period of the high probability state does not become long due to the period of the dynamic display, so that the discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state can be reduced. .. Then, in the case where the first dynamic display with a high possibility of winning the special game state in the lottery is not executed and the second dynamic display with a low possibility of winning in the special game state in the lottery is executed, the second Since the period in which the dynamic display is executed is shorter than that in the first dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is smaller than that in the case where the first dynamic display is executed. Therefore, the chance of lottery that allows more transitions to the special game state is left. On the other hand, if the first dynamic display that is highly likely to win the special game state in the lottery is executed and the second dynamic display that is unlikely to be won in the special game state is not executed in the lottery, the first dynamic display Since the period for which the display is executed is longer than that for the second dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is smaller than that for the case where the second dynamic display is executed. Therefore, if it is not decided to transit to the special gaming state due to the dynamic fluctuation, the chances of the lottery that can transit to the special gaming state are reduced. As a result, the player's desire to decide to make a transition to the special game state is inevitable in the dynamic display. That is, the enthusiasm for the dynamic display is heightened. Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the lottery that can make a transition to the special game state varies depending on the dynamic display executed in the high-probability state, so that the player can be provided with a new game property. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the game ball, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set as the first probability The area detection means and the high-probability start means set the second probability as the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery, and after a predetermined period of time, the game balls that have entered the high-probability start area are A ball guiding means for guiding to a high-probability end area, and the high-probability end means, in the lottery, when the end area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability end area. A gaming machine F2, wherein the probability of winning a special gaming state is set to the first probability.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. The high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability when the end area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability ending area. The ball guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability start area to the high probability end area after a predetermined period after the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability by the high probability start means. .. As a result, the player can predict the end of the high probability state from the movement of the ball guided by the ball guiding means. In the ball guiding means described in the gaming machine F2, the mode of guiding the game ball entering the high-probability start region to the high-probability end region is not limited to the mode of bringing the game ball close to the high-probability end region. For example, the ball guiding means is a blocking member that blocks the route to the high probability end area, and the game ball is retained in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member is released when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that there is a high probability. It may be a mode of leading to the end region. Further, the ball guiding means may be a slope, and the game ball that has entered the high-probability start area may have a high-probability end area at the point where it flows down the slope. During the period until the ball guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability starting area to the high probability ending area, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high probability starting means is set to the second probability, It need not be related to the number of dynamic displays determined by the static display determination means.

In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high probability start means to the second probability, and then the high probability end means in the special game state in the lottery. In the first period until the probability of being won to the first probability is not changed to the special game state in the first period, the high probability start means wins the special game state in the lottery. A gaming machine configured to guide a game ball entering the high-probability start area to the high-probability end area so that the probability is set to the second probability. F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guiding means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means to the second probability and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability ending means to the first probability. The first period is configured to guide the game ball entering the high-probability start region to the high-probability end region so as to become a predetermined period when the special game state does not transition in the first period. Thereby, regardless of the length of the period in which the dynamic display is executed, the period of the high probability state when the special game state is not transitioned can be made constant. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state.

In the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means retains the gaming ball that has entered the high probability start area by a first stopping means and the gaming ball stopped by the first stopping means. A game machine F4, comprising: a first movement executing means for moving so as to lead to the high probability end area during a period in which the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guiding means, the first stop means for stopping the game ball that has entered the high probability start area, and the game ball stopped by the first stop means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information. During the period of execution, there is provided a first movement executing means for moving to a high probability end region. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is not executed unless the game ball is entered in the specific area, so that the game ball stopped in the first stopping means does not approach the high probability end area. Absent.

For example, due to factors such as a failure of a ball launching device that shoots a game ball on the game board, a game ball being clogged in a nail on the game board, or a nail on the game board being fastened to the specific area, the game is played in the specific area. It is possible that the ball cannot be entered or is difficult. In these cases, when the game ball stopped by the first stopping means approaches the high-probability end area, chances of lottery in the high-probability state decrease, so that the player's profit cannot be secured. According to the present invention, as long as the game ball is not entered in the specific area, the game ball stopped in the first stopping means does not approach the high probability end area, and the chance of lottery in the high probability state is not reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit of the player can be protected.

In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means guides the game ball, which is stopped by the second stopping means, to the high probability end area, and the second stopping means that holds the game ball entering the high probability start area. As described above, when the dynamic display determination means determines the dynamic display of the identification information, the movement amount corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display determination means and the second movement execution means for moving And a gaming machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guide means is a second display means for stopping the game ball that entered the high probability start area, and a dynamic display determination means for guiding the game ball stopped by the second stop means to the high probability end area. And a second movement executing means for moving the movement amount corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by. Thereby, the player who knows the movement amount of the game ball stopped at the second stop means corresponding to the period of the dynamic display has a high probability end area of the game ball when visually recognizing the dynamic display. You can decide whether to approach. That is, there is an effect that the end of the high probability state can be predicted from the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability by the high-probability start means, and then the special game state is set in the lottery by the high-probability end means. A first period storage means for storing a value representing a period until the probability of winning becomes the first probability, and a probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means as the second probability. It is determined from the first progress storage means that stores a value representing the elapsed time since the completion of the operation, and the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first time duration storage means. A high probability that the first excess judgment means and the probability that the special gaming state is won in the lottery based on the fact that the elapsed time has been exceeded by the first excess judgment means are the first probability. A gaming machine F6, comprising: forced termination means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the following effect is produced. For example, a game ball that has entered the high-probability start area reaches the high-probability end area due to a fraudulent act such as the ball-guide means breaking or being destroyed, or the guide ball of the game ball being blocked by the ball-guide means. If not possible, the high-probability state will not end unless the game ball reaches the high-probability end region, so the high-probability state can be illegally extended. However, according to the present invention, after the first excess determination means determines the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the second probability from the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first period storage means. If it is determined that the elapsed period of is exceeded, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high-probability forced termination means is set to the first probability, and thus it is possible to prevent the high-probability state from being illegally extended. effective.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a judging means for judging whether or not the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is a predetermined gaming state before the second probability, and a predetermined means by the judging means. When it is determined that the game state is in the game state, even if the start area detection unit detects that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is The high probability non-starting means which is not the second probability and the start area detecting means detect that the game ball has entered the high probability starting area, and the high probability non-starting means causes the special game state in the lottery. If the probability of winning is not set to the second probability, the third stop means for stopping the game ball that entered the high probability start area, and the game ball stopped at the third stop means are Third movement executing means for moving the high-probability end area so as to lead to the high-probability end area and the start area detecting means detecting that the game ball has entered the high-probability start area, and then the third movement of the game ball Second period storage means for moving the execution means and storing a value representing a scheduled period until the end area detection means detects a game ball entering the high probability end area, and the start area detection means. By the second progress storage means for storing a value representing the elapsed time after it is detected that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, the value of the second progress storage means and the second period storage means. And a second excess determining means for determining that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period, and the second excess determining means determines that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period. A gaming machine F7, comprising: a notifying means for making a predetermined notification based on

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F6, the following effect is produced. When the determination means determines that the predetermined game state before the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability, the high-probability non-starting means determines the high-probability start area by the start area detecting means. Even if it is detected that a game ball has entered, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is not the second probability. In the case of this predetermined game state, the game ball entered in the high probability start area and stopped by the third stop means is guided to the high probability end area by the third movement executing means. When the second excess determination means determines from the second period storage means and the second elapsed storage means that the scheduled period exceeds the elapsed period, the notification means gives a predetermined notification. As a result, if the ball guiding means and the end area detecting means are normal in the predetermined game state, the predetermined notification is not made. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is given, the player or the clerk of the game hall who has visually confirmed the predetermined notification can know that the ball guiding means or the end area detecting means is out of order.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, whether or not the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display based on the fact that the game area has entered the high probability end area by the end area detection means. The dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not, and the dynamic display execution determining means determines that the dynamic display executing means is executing the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is In the case of setting the first probability, the high-probability ending schedule means for setting the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery to the first probability is provided, and the high-probability ending means is the high probability. When the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is scheduled to be the first probability by the probability end schedule means, the special display in the lottery is performed after the dynamic display execution means stops the dynamic display. A gaming machine F8, which is configured so that the probability of winning the gaming state is the first probability.

The gaming machine F8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. For example, when a game ball that has entered the high-probability start area is guided by the ball guiding means and is entered in the high-probability end area immediately before the stop of the dynamic display, the player is There is a concern that the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the first probability or the second probability. According to the present invention, the high-probability-end-scheduling means is determined by the dynamic-display-execution determining means that the dynamic-display executing means is executing the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the first probability. In this case, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is scheduled to be the first probability. When this schedule is made, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the first probability after the dynamic display execution means stops the dynamic display, and thus the player is confused. Even if there is a risk, there is an effect that the player is not confused.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, a third progress storage means for storing a value representing an elapsed period of a period in which the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the second probability, and the special game in the lottery. When it is decided to transition to the special game state in the lottery while the probability of winning the game state is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means is, the more valuable the player is given to the player. A gaming machine F9, characterized by comprising a valuable value amount determining means for determining a large amount of value.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F8, the following effect is produced. When the value of the valuable value amount determining means determines to transition to the special gaming state in the lottery while the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means is, Decide a large amount of valuable value to give to the player. In other words, the earlier the high probability state is started, the more valuable value is given to the player.

For example, in the gaming machine in which the high probability state is newly started after the special game state when it is decided to transit to the special game state during the high probability state, the player starts the high probability state. It is hoped that the transition to the special game state will be decided at an early stage after the elapsed time. According to the present invention, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the amount of valuable value also increases, so that the player is pleased twice. On the contrary, if it is decided that the transition to the special game state is made at a stage where the elapsed time from the start of the high probability state is late, the player is discouraged because the amount of valuable value is small. On the other hand, since it has been decided that the high-probability state is newly started after the special game state, not only is it discouraged, but a new hope can be found. In this way, in the gaming machine having the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the second probability, the period until the guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability start region to the high probability end region There is an effect that it can provide a new interest that corresponds to the valuable value. The "period" described in the claims means "time".

<Characteristic G group> (Set the probable variation period by the period until the total value of the points set in the selected variation pattern is reached)
On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. A dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display mode. A privilege game executing means for executing the above, and a state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being judged to be a hit by the hit determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the gaming machine having the above, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is provided with unique totalable total information for each dynamic display mode, and the dynamic display mode On the basis of the dynamic display mode being determined by the mode determining means, the total information provided to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired and totaled with the total information acquired so far. When the special state is set by the aggregation means and the state setting means, the aggregation determination means that determines the aggregation information that is aggregated by the aggregation means, and the result determined by the aggregation determination means is predetermined. A game machine G1 comprising: a state switching setting means for setting the special state to be switched to the normal state when it is determined that the result is the result.

According to the gaming machine G1, the success/failure determination is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from a plurality of dynamic display modes. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Here, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is provided with unique totalable total information for each dynamic display mode. Based on the fact that the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the totalizing information given to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired by the totalizing means. Then, the totalizing information acquired so far is totaled by the totalizing means. When the special state is set by the state setting means, the totalization information aggregated by the aggregation means is determined by the aggregation determination means. When it is determined that the result determined by the totalizing determination unit is a predetermined result, the state switching setting unit sets the special state to the normal state. As a result, the special state is set until the predetermined result is obtained by the totalizing determination means, so that the player can enjoy the game while predicting the current totaling result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine G1, the aggregate information given to the dynamic display mode is composed of numerical information, and the aggregate discriminating means discriminates whether the total value of the numerical information is equal to or more than a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode from a plurality of different dynamic display modes based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means. Greater numerical value information is provided in the dynamic display mode that is easily determined by the dynamic display mode determination means when the win/fail judgment result of the win/loss determination means is the judgment result to be displayed in the specific identification information. A gaming machine G2, which is provided as the total information.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the total information given to the dynamic display mode is composed of numerical information. The totalization determination unit determines whether the total value of the numerical information is equal to or more than a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from among a plurality of different dynamic display modes by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means. In the dynamic display mode that is easy to be determined when the win/no judgment result of the win/no judgment unit by the dynamic display mode determination unit is a judgment result that is displayed with specific identification information, larger numerical information is used as the aggregated information. Has been granted. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode in which the result of the hit determination is set to be easily displayed with the specific identification information is selected, a large numerical value information is set, so that it is special according to the expectation to the jackpot of the player. The effect is that the remaining period of the state can be set to be reduced.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the counting means starts counting based on the special state being set by the state setting means, and the special state or the normal state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine G3 having an initialization means for initializing the information aggregated by the aggregation means based on the setting.

The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, based on the special state being set by the state setting means, the tallying means starts the tallying. The information aggregated by the aggregation unit is initialized by the initialization unit based on the setting of the special state or the normal state by the state setting unit. As a result, when the special state is started, the counting can be started from the initialized state. Therefore, there is an effect that the special state can be set every time from the start of the special state to the predetermined aggregation result.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, and G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (a part of display means)
Numeral 203n Probable odds object entrance counter (detection number storage means)
703 Probability change generation switch (first detection means)
704a Probably variable rotating body motor (part of moving means)
704b Ball receiving portion (holding means)
707 Probability change end switch (second detection means)
S103 Part of privilege game executing means S207 Part of setting condition determination processing S210 Status setting switching processing S306 Part of state setting means S808 Abnormality processing means S901 Validity judgment means S908 Dynamic display time determination means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variable effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. Variation effect is a demonstration that sphere ball entrance opening is initiated by Rukoto be ball entrance, for example, the effective three horizontally or vertically in the display area, or 3 × squares are a total of nine symbols, etc. 3 displaying, by scrolling images, etc. to be displayed based on a predetermined game condition, when the scrolling stops, generating an equivalent or if the stop symbols are a combination predetermined in the predetermined stop position It is what makes me.

Further, during the scrolling of the symbol or the like, sometimes advantageous gaming state (e.g., those Tari) for the player interest effect suggests that a pre (e.g., effects by the reach display, etc.) is performed, advantageously It has also been devised to give players a sense of expectation for such games. Furthermore, the effects by the reach display, not only suggest that the person Tari, the stop symbol when scrolling is stopped, after those have enough, the probability of those Tari becomes high probability (high probability state) There is also a game machine that produces an effect that expects whether or not.

JP, 2008-272159, A

In the conventional game machine, in the high-probability state, the game becomes too monotonous, the player has a problem that say get bored in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early. ..

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a determination unit capable of performing the determination, and display means identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination unit is displayed, the display Advantageous to the player when the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. It is advantageous for the player based on the bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game and the detection of the game ball by the first detection unit capable of detecting the game ball after the bonus game is executed. possess a special state setting means for setting a special state, and when the special state is set, has a varying means which is variable in response to the dynamic display period of said identification information, said varying means , The first detection unit forms a holding unit capable of holding the detected game ball at the first position, and holds the game ball held by the holding unit from the first position to the second position. The game machine is configured to be movable while being held by a section, and the gaming machine, which has been moved to the second position in the state where the special state is set, rolls out of the holding section, and its game When a dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed after the ball is detected, a normal state setting means capable of setting a normal state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the special state is provided. is there.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1 , the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means are displayed on the display means. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information, and a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the display means displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, A special state that is advantageous to the player is set based on the privilege game executing means to be executed and the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection unit that can detect the game ball after the privilege game is executed. Special state setting means, and when the special state is set, there is provided variable means that is varied corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information, the variable means comprising the first detection By the part, a holding part capable of holding the detected game ball at the first position is formed, and the game ball held by the holding part is held by the holding part from the first position to the second position. In the state where the special state is set, the game ball that has been moved to the second position rolls out of the holding portion, and the game ball is detected. After that, when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a normal state setting means capable of setting a normal state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the special state is provided .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram of the definite odd-effect object arranged on the game board of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen and effective line setting of the third symbol display device, and (b) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device when the double reach is established. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows various data stored in a ROM in the main control device. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters of the main control apparatus, various reserved ball storage areas, and various reserved ball execution areas. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of a big hit random number table, (b) is a figure which showed an example of a big hit classification table typically, (c) is a big hit variation pattern table FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example, FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 8E is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically. It is the figure which showed typically the operation of the probability variation thing object arrange|positioned at the game board of a pachinko machine, (a) is a schematic diagram immediately after a probability variation start, (b) is a schematic diagram during a probability variation Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram just before the end of the probability change. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle from the probability variation start and the variation of the probability variation object arrange|positioned at the game board of a pachinko machine, (a) is a schematic diagram when it does not hit big during the probability variation. Yes, (b) is a schematic diagram in the case of a big hit during the probability change, (c) is a schematic diagram when two balls enter the probability change object, (d) is during the probability change It is a schematic diagram at the time of the probability variation rotary body of a probability variation thing thing stopping. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a probability variation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change completion|finish schedule process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a probability variation ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows probability variation period progress processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle from the probability variation|varieties object and the time from the probability variation start which were arrange|positioned at the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, (a) is fluctuation production during a probability variation. Is a schematic diagram when there is no interruption, and (b) is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main control unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a ROM in the main control unit in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed various stored data typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits in 3rd Embodiment, (b) was shown typically the example of the variation pattern table for deviation in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the elapsed time from the probability change start and the total value of "probability change period progress score" in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation period progress process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change possibility judgment start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation determination completion process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change possibility judging processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a ROM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed various stored data typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the deviation pattern tables AE for deviation in 5th Embodiment, (b) shows typically an example of the switching selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which was, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the small hitting random number table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
<Pachinko machine 10>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 31. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in association with the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start start winning) described later. Various productions such as variation productions and reach productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, the "sea stage" with the motif of the sea of shallow water, the "palace stage" with the motif of the undersea palace, the "deep sea stage" with the motif of the deep sea are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like affixed to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off. It should be noted that while the operation handle 51 is being rotated clockwise by the player, balls are continuously fired at predetermined time intervals (for example, one ball is fired every 0.6 seconds).

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80. , The definite odd object 700 (see FIG. 4) and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are provided on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ab, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37Aa. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as a light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are for displaying in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

All of the plurality of LEDs 37Ab, 37Ba are in the probability change (during high-probability game state) that the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state in which the lottery probability of jackpot is set to a higher probability than in the normal time, or the lottery probability of the jackpot is usually It is a low probability of time, but the lottery probability of jackpot is low probability, and the lottery probability of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to a higher probability than normal time. The probability is set to a low probability in the normal state (in the normal probability game state) is indicated by the lighting state, whether it is fluctuating (in the dynamic display) is indicated by the lighting state, The stopped symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot, or a detached symbol by the lighting state, or the number of reserved balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Aa and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

As will be described later in detail, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when a game ball enters the electric tulip 702 of the probability variation object 700 and the probability variation generation switch 703 (see FIG. 4) detects the game ball. .. The entry into the electric tulip 702 is restricted unless it is determined that a high-probability state is given, that is, the execution of the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "4R probability variation jackpot" is determined. ing. Therefore, since the case where the probability change occurs is determined controllably, it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance is significantly increased.

Further, when the execution of “15R probability variation big hit” or “4R probability variation big hit” is determined, a probability variation start schedule flag 203m (see FIG. 7A) described later is turned on. When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects a game ball, the probability variation is provided on condition that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on. Therefore, even if a game ball is illegally inserted into the electric tulip 702, it is possible to suppress a problem that a positive change occurs.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot in which a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 is given to the player after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds. is there. The “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot in which the player is given a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 after the jackpot with the maximum round number of four rounds. Furthermore, when execution of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "4R probability variation jackpot" is determined, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON, a game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability variation generation switch 703 is operated. Probability variation is set based on the detection of the sphere.

On the other hand, in the "15R regular jackpot", after the jackpot of 15 rounds, the game ball can enter the electric tulip 702, although the number of rounds is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). The probability that the probability change start schedule 203m is not set to ON.

In addition, "probability change (high-probability game state)" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the lottery that is performed when there is a ball in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is increased. In other words, in other words, it is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state (big hit). Although the details will be described later, during the probability variation period (high probability game state period) in this embodiment, the probability variation generation switch 703 of the probability variation object 700 detects the game ball, and then the probability variation end switch 707 detects the game ball. Until.

On the other hand, the "low-probability game state" refers to a state when the probability is not changing and the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. Further, the "low-probability game state" includes a time saving state (time saving medium) and a normal state. “Low probability game state” means that the jackpot probability remains the low probability at the normal time, only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The state. On the other hand, the normal state of the "low probability state" is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time reduction (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up).

Although details will be described later, during the probability change or shortening of time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the variation time of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time, and is associated with the second entrance 640. The time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to hit the ball. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not limited to that during the probability change or the shortening of the time, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed. May be changed. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times of operations may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not changed, and the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal case.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of three symbols, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are triggered by passage of a sphere. A second symbol display device 83, which is composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols, is provided. The number of passages of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the second symbol holding lamp 84 that lights and displays the number of reserved balls is below the third symbol display device 81. 4 are arranged symmetrically for the maximum number of holdings. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first symbol display device 37A, A decorative display corresponding to the display of 37B is performed. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured by using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device of the third symbol.

In this way, by displaying the third symbol that is dynamically displayed according to the display of the first symbol, even if the first symbol is a period in which the dynamic display must be continued, the third symbol is not displayed. It is possible to display and display characters and the like, reduce the size of the display, or temporarily stop the display. Further, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, by stopping and displaying the third symbol with a symbol showing the same lottery result as the first symbol, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the first symbol in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, the third symbol is displayed as a symbol showing a lottery result different from the information of the lottery result of the first symbol (for example, if it is a probability variation jackpot, a symbol showing a normal jackpot). In addition, by configuring to notify that the probability is a big hit during the big hit game, it is possible to make the player expect a transition to the positive change state even during the big hit game.

<Structure of Probably Altered Object 700>
Here, with reference to FIG. 4, a configuration of the definite odd-effect object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the definite alternation object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. The definite transformation object 700 includes a through switch 701, an electric tulip 702, a blocking unit 702b, and a definite transformation body 704.

The through switch 701 is a switch that triggers whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the through switch 701, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened when the probability variation start schedule 203m (see FIG. 7) is turned on (FIG. 7). 16 S203).

The method of opening the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and a lottery for deciding whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 based on the ball entering the through switch 701 may be performed. Good. For example, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the through switch 701, and when the value is 7, for example, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on or off. Regardless of whether or not the electric tulip 702 may be opened. With such a configuration, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be transited to the probability variation without winning the probability variation jackpot, so that the range of playability can be expanded.

In addition, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened for a certain period of time, based on the determination that “15R probability variation jackpot” or “4R probability variation jackpot” is provided without providing the through switch 701. May be. In this case, after the first symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is started, a predetermined period during the jackpot game, or a predetermined period after the jackpot game is finished, and so on. Conceivable.

The electric tulip 702 includes an electric accessory 702a, a probability change generation switch 703, a route 703a, and a route outlet 703b. The electric accessory 702a has a pair of blade members arranged facing each other with a width that allows one game ball to pass therethrough. The blade member is normally held in a vertically standing state. The blocking portion 702b is arranged at the opening position where the game ball formed by the upright blade member can enter, and prevents (prohibits) the game ball from entering the electric tulip 702. Then, when the game ball enters the through switch 701 with the probability variation start schedule flag 203m turned on, the blade members rotate about 45 degrees in a direction in which the tips of the blades are separated from each other, and the electric tulip 702 is played. The sphere is changed to a possible state.

The game ball that has entered the electric tulip 702 flows down the path 703b formed in the electric tulip 702, and is detected by the probability change generation switch 703 provided at the end of the path 703b. The probability change generation switch 703 is a magnetic field detection sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball, and detects passage of the game ball by changing the magnetic field as the game ball passes.

When the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects a game ball and the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (probability variation). That is, the probability change generation switch 703 is a switch that triggers the setting of the high-probability game state.

The electric accessory 702a is always set in a standing state (a state in which the electric tulip is closed) except that the electric accessory 702a is opened as the ball enters the through switch 701. When the electric accessory 702a is rotated (the electric tulip 702 is opened), the game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change switch 703 detects the game ball. Then, the electric accessory 702a is turned upright (the electric tulip 702 is closed) (see S205 in FIG. 16).

Further, the method of closing the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and it may be configured to close the electric tulip 702 after continuing the opening for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the case of opening, closing and opening may be repeated a predetermined number of times for each predetermined period.

The probability change generation switch 703 is a switch that detects the entry of a ball. When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 sets (generates) the probability variation (see S206 in FIG. 16).

A cylindrical path 703a and a path outlet 703b are provided in the vertical direction of the probability variation generation switch 703, and connect the electric tulip 702 and the probability variation accessory case 705. The route 703a is made of a transparent material, and the sphere inside the route 703a can be visually recognized.

The probability variation rotating body 704 includes a probability variation rotating body motor 704a, a ball receiving portion 704b, a probability variation component case 705, a ball discharging portion 706, a probability variation ending switch 707, a path 707a, and a path outlet 707b.

The probability variable rotating body motor 704 is supported by the center of the ball receiving portion 704b and rotates the ball receiving portion. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the ball receiving portion 704b is provided with a concave portion in which a game ball can enter one ball in a part of a cylindrical outer shape. Normally, the ball receiving portion 704b is arranged in a state in which the concave portion is oriented vertically upward by the probability varying rotor motor 704 (a state in which the game ball discharged from the route outlet 707b can be received by the concave portion). When a game ball enters the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b, the probability varying rotor motor 704 rotates the ball receiving portion 704b, and when the recess moves to the position of the ball discharging portion 706, the game entering the recess is played. The ball is configured to flow into the path 707a from the ball discharge unit 706.

A probability change end switch 707 is arranged in the middle of the route 707a, and the game ball can be detected. The game ball detected by the probability variation end switch 707 further flows down the route 707a, and then discharged from the route outlet 707b.

Here, the probability variable rotating body motor 704a will be described in more detail. The probability variable rotating body motor 704a is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver. The stepping motor is controlled by outputting a predetermined command capable of designating at least a target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), a rotation direction, and a rotation speed from the MPU 201 to the motor driver. The motor driver determines that the target angle designated by the MPU 201 is more than one step of the stepping motor (for example, one rotation of 1000 pulses corresponds to one step of 0.36 degrees) with respect to the current angle of the stepping motor. Then, the stepping motor is rotated by outputting a predetermined number of pulses in accordance with the designated rotation direction and rotation speed. Further, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a (stepping motor) from the motor driver. Since the maximum clock frequency of the motor driver is equal to or higher than every 2 milliseconds (=500 Hz) which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing of the MPU 201 (for example, 5 MHz), it is 2 mm which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing of the MPU 201. It is possible to control the stepping motor by outputting a predetermined command to the motor driver every second.

When the probability varying rotor motor 704a is operated by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 22), the sphere received in the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b is connected to the probability varying end switch 707 that triggers the probability variation ending. The ball is discharged to the sphere discharging unit 706.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise (the same angle each time) by “angle AX” at intervals of 2 milliseconds (see FIG. 22 ). That is, the ball retained in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b is moved to the ball discharging portion 706 by rotating the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed by the positive variable rotating body motor 704a of the positive variable rotating body 704. Then, the game balls discharged from the ball discharging unit 706 are detected by the probability change end switch 707, and the lottery probability is set from high probability to low probability. That is, the probability variation period is set by the time (period) in which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates. The “angle AX” will be described later.

In the following, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b faces vertically upward (a state in which the concave portion is located below the path outlet 703b) is referred to as a state in which the probability varying rotating body 704 is at the "angle A1". Further, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap each other is described as a state in which the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2”. Further, the angle formed by the probability varying rotor 704 in the clockwise direction from the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2” is referred to as “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”. In this embodiment, the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotator 704” is 300 degrees.

The probability varying accessory case 705 is a cylindrical case body that surrounds the probability varying rotating body 704 and allows the probability varying rotating body 704 to be visually recognized. Since the probability altering substance case 705 is made of a transparent material, the game ball received in the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the cylindrical side surface of the definite odd object case 705 is not provided with an opening other than a passage through which the game ball from the route exit 703b through which the game ball entering the electric tulip 702 flows down, is excluded from the route exit 703b. Thus, it is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b. The probability variation object case 705 is configured such that, when a game ball enters the recess of the ball receiving portion 704b, the ball receiving portion 704b can rotate with the game ball entering the recess. In addition, the inner side wall surface is arranged at a distance that prevents the game ball from coming out of the recess from the recess. Accordingly, even if the ball receiving portion 704b is rotated to the position where the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b faces vertically downward, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball comes out of the concave portion to the outside.

The ball discharging unit 706 is a discharge port for discharging the ball received in the concave portion of the ball receiving unit 704b to the outside of the certain probability modification object 700. The ball discharging portion 706 is a hole provided in the game board 13 and is connected to a path 707a provided with a probability variation end switch 707. Since the lower portion of the ball that is being stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b is inclined toward the ball discharging portion 706, when the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b becomes The ball is discharged from the ball discharging unit 706.

The probability change end switch 707 is set to the end of the probability change based on the detection of the ball entering by the probability change end switch 707 (see S404 in FIG. 19). A cylindrical path 707a is provided in the vertical direction of the probability variation end switch 707, and connects the ball discharging portion 706 and the path outlet 707b. The ball that has passed through the route exit 707b is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10.

The probability variation accessory 700 of the pachinko machine 10 is an accessory for setting the start and end of the probability variation. The probability change start is set upon the arrival of the ball in the probability change occurrence switch 703, and the end of the probability change is set upon the occurrence of the ball to the probability change end switch 707. The sphere that has passed the probability variation generation switch 703 is retained in the concave portion of the sphere receiving portion 704b, guided to the sphere discharging portion 706 connected to the probability variation ending switch 707 at a constant speed, and then passes through the probability variation ending switch 707. .. As the longest period in which the probability variation is set, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the game ball and the start of the probability variation is set, the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch 707 and the end of the probability variation is set. Therefore, it is a period until the probability change ends without a big hit in the probability change period. The longest period in which this probability change is set is referred to as the “maximum probability change period”. Although the details will be described later, the “probability variation longest period” is about 361 seconds in the present embodiment when only one sphere enters the probability variation role object 700.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation is set, the probability variation remaining time can be determined by the probability variation role object 700, so that the player is made aware of the probability variation period remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the effective line setting. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when so-called double reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display region Dm that variably displays the third symbol over almost the entire area of the screen. Further, in the lower center of the main display area Dm, the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (holding balls) is reserved. A reserved display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm includes 10 types of main symbols including 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, It is composed of one type of sub-pattern (in the present embodiment, a picture of a shell) formed smaller than the main pattern. These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub-symbols between each main symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when detecting a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, a big hit lottery is carried out, and together with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display In the device 81, the variation effect (dynamic effect) of the third symbol is executed. The variation effect (dynamic effect) is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol are cyclically scrolled (lateral scroll) from right to left (direction of arrow X) for each symbol row. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in a descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are arranged so as to appear in an ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in each of the symbol columns (Z1 to Z3) in three stages of left, middle, and right. .. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In addition, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, five lines including a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a rightward rising line L4, and a leftward rising line L5 are set as valid lines.

In the pachinko machine 10, at the time of each game, when the variation effect of scrolling horizontally is stopped, if any combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, jackpot. The jackpot video is displayed as.

That is, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display (fluctuation effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the fluctuation effect ends. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after it hits. When it is possible to throw a ball into the probability variation generation switch 703 (see Fig. 4) after the jackpot is over (it is easier to enter the ball than in the normal case) (in the case of a probability variation jackpot), the main number corresponding to an odd number A variation effect in which the symbols (corresponding to the “probability variation pattern”) are arranged is performed.

In the case of the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m that allows the ball to enter the probability variation bonus object 700 is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23), so that the game ball passes through the through switch 701, and thus the electric tulip 702. Is opened, and the game ball can enter the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a variation effect in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are arranged is performed. In the case of a normal big hit, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not turned on (maintained off). That is, the electric tulip 702 is not set to the open state even when the game ball passes through the through switch 701, and the game ball cannot enter the electric tulip.

The stop of the variation effect is performed in the order of the upper symbol sequence Z1→the lower symbol sequence Z3→the middle symbol sequence Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. If so, a screen notifying that effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as “reach established”, and a sound notifying reach is provided on the pachinko machine 10 by the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5). ). Here, "reach" represents a state in which, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, a big hit may occur due to the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 5(b), at the stage where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left/middle of each symbol row Z1, Z3 -The arrangement of the 3rd symbol on the right three stages may be the opposite arrangement. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, main symbols (dugons) of “7”, sub symbols (shellfish), and main symbols of “6” (shark) are arranged in order from the left. In the lower symbol row Z1, the main symbol (shark), the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (Dugon) of "7" are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. And, the arrangement of the third symbols is reversed.

In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 becomes the main symbol (shark) of "6", the main symbol of "6" on the activated line L4 ( (Shark), that is, since the regular symbols, which are the main symbols corresponding to the even symbols, are aligned, it is usually a big hit, and after the big hit, it shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Dugon) of "7", it is the main symbol (Dugon) of "7" on the activated line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probability variation symbols are aligned, a probability variation jackpot is obtained, and after the jackpot is over, the probability variation generation switch 703 (see FIG. 4) of the probability variation winning object 700 is easily inserted into the ball. That is, the state shown in FIG. 5(b) may be a big hit on the two activated lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, both a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. It is in a possible state, that is, in a “double reach” state in which two reaches are established.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, double reach can be established in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, it becomes a mere single reach (reach where the possibility of being a big hit only on one activated line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed) In comparison, the player can be expected to be more likely to win the jackpot. Further, it is possible to make the player have more complicated emotions such as whether it is a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot and the player loses. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The hold display area Db is an area for displaying the number of hold balls, which is the number of balls (hold balls) that have not been changed, among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display 81 (first symbol display 37A, 37B), The number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to 4 times for the entrance into the first entrance 64, and up to 4 for the entrance into the second entrance 640. The total value of the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also in the reserved display area Db.

In the hold display area Db, one hold ball number pattern (● symbol of FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b)) is displayed for each hold ball number, and the hold number is held according to the display number of the hold ball number pattern. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one holding sphere number design is displayed in the holding display area Db, it indicates that the number of holding spheres is one, and when eight holding sphere count designs are displayed, the number of holding spheres Indicates 8 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the reserved display area Db, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Similarly, in the case of entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 are not limited to the same number of times, but are different. It may be set to the number of times. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 may be set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 may be set to two.

In addition, instead of displaying the number of holding balls in the holding display area Db, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into one or a plurality of areas is the number of holding balls. You may make it display in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 for a predetermined time. The variable display is made to alternately light up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, the winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is displayed. It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. Thereby, during the probability change and time reduction, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and the shortening of time.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortened time, the second entrance hole may be increased during the probability change or the shortened time by other methods such as increasing the hit probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When it is in a state where the ball easily enters 640, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and of the balls launched to the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the left side of the game board can pass through. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol. The hold lamp 84 is also illuminated.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the first symbol display device. You may make it perform using a part of 3 symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to 4 times, and is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a second ball entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 are shown. Although configured the same, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different, For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. You may.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state of easily entering the second entrance 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high during the probability change and the shortening of the time period as compared with the normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during normal time during the probability change and the shortening of time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as will be described later in detail, the probability of a big hit depending on whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. It is the same whether or not there is a high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is that when the ball hits the second entrance port 640, the ball hits the first entrance port 64. Set higher than if. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, the jackpot is stopped so that the jackpot pattern 1 While turning on the LED 37Ab of the symbol display device 37A, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

A second variable winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entry slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, a jackpot stop pattern 1 The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 650a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are, specifically, a horizontally elongated rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis to the front side. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided when a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is provided in the game area, and the LED 37Ab, LED37Ba corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are lit. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning openings 65a, 650a while the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened for a predetermined time. You may make it the game state opened for a predetermined number of times as a special game state.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU 201, a major hit of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 includes a special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, and a special figure 2. Reserved sphere number counter 203e, public figure reserved sphere number counter 203f, public figure reserved sphere storage area 203i, public figure reserved sphere execution area 203j, special figure classification flag 203k, probability changing flag 203l, probability changing start scheduled flag 203m, probability transforming object It has at least a ball entry counter 203n, a probability variation period memory 203o, a probability variation period measurement counter 203p, and a probability variation ending schedule flag 203q.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and an outlier variation pattern table 202d.

Further, in the main controller 110, the above-described jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 of the pachinko machine 10. In order to execute main processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) that stores various counters.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202, and various holding ball storages provided in the RAM 203. Areas 203a, 203b, 203i and various holding ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the main controller 110 Used in MPU201.

As each counter, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation pattern selection are used. Variation type counter CS1, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, a second random number counter C4 used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second hit A second initial value random number counter CINI2 used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C4 is set. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, as will be described later in detail, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in any of the reserved special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 hold second provided in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is stored in any of the first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number to be a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. The first random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when the ball is won (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the big hit random number table 202a (big hit random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a big hit.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. This jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types, one for a low probability state (state that is not in probability variation) and a high probability state (state during probability variation) that has a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers included in each of the jackpots is set differently. By changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random number value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300 (=3/900).

On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448. , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" is associated with the "high probability state" of the "gaming state" and is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is 1/30 (=30/900).

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state” are duplicate values. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not happen. If a value that is a big hit random number value exists regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the big hit may be illegally assigned. As in the present embodiment, the value of the random number to be a big hit is predicted by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state). Since it can be made difficult, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the second ball entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 2 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in () is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number, it is a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuating effect or the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, “stop type”). Is called) when it comes off. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a big hit, it is a variation effect. The fluctuation pattern and stop type are those at the time of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds, it is possible to enter a ball into the electric tulip 702 that triggers the transition to the high probability state, “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum round. "15R normal jackpot", which is a short-time state for 100 fluctuations in the low-probability state after a 15-round jackpot, and an electric tulip that triggers a transition to a high-probability state after a maximum round number of 4 rounds. There is a "4R probability variation jackpot" that makes it easier to throw a ball into 702.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a big hit, and the second hit The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a big hit, The following is defined as a jackpot type table for the "first entrance". That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big jackpot is awarded along with a winning in the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is a 15R probability variable jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), it becomes a 15R normal jackpot, and with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), it becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the second entrance port 640 is a big hit, "for the second entrance port" The following is defined as a jackpot classification table of. That is, the value "0-24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R certainty variation jackpot, and the value "25-49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, in the case of a jackpot due to the winning of the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is a probability 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), the 15R regular jackpot and the 1/4 (=25/100) probability, the 4R probability variation jackpot.

In this way, the probability of being a 15R certainty variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the second entrance port 640 when the ball enters the first entrance port 64. It is set higher than if it were a ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 depending on the open/close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, but the ball can always enter.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stops including "rear out of front/rear" that stops when the reach is reached, and "reach other than out of front/rear" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete detachment" in which reach does not occur ( A production pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time and the value of the first random number counter C1 together with the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of deviation. It

Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values for which stop types are selected. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it becomes difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, a table having a narrow range of random values 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “Completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out of front/back" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out of front/back" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining a fluctuation pattern, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), returns to 0. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) the first ball entrance 64, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in FIG. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in FIG.

The MPU 201 uses a variation type counter CS1, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C) and a deviation variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9D to 9E) stored in the ROM 202, so-called normal reach. Change patterns such as super reach, special reach, etc. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The mode of variation is determined.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the fluctuation pattern tables, a big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d used at the time of disengagement. Here, as the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for deviation, which is selected when the game state is a normal low probability state excluding the time saving, The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 selected for is set.

Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in () is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is output from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

Further, one reserved area in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth area, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth area) If the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in) is not a big hit random number (that is, if it is a random number that is out of range), the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding time saving and shortening. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, when the gaming state is in the time saving or the probability variation, the variation pattern is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of a big hit include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, a variation pattern (variation time period) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. ) Is selected.

Here, various types of normal reach are variation patterns in which the variation time is as short as 30 seconds, and variation patterns in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a short reach. Various types of super reach are variation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than various types of normal reach, and a first pattern (or a third pattern) after a relatively long reach (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach). ) Is a variation pattern. The special reach type is a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, which is longer than that of the various types of super reach, and the reach that is performed for the longest time (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the normal reach is the super reach) It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach etc.).

It should be noted that "various reach" means that there are many things with different effects even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, or a certain character is displayed. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as one in which a notice effect before the start of variation is added, and one in which an effect that makes a big hit by re-variation is added.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c represents a variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 to 198 for various types of special reach.

By selecting various super reach and special reach types that have long fluctuation times as fluctuation patterns, it is possible to greatly expand the expectation that the player will be a jackpot while the fluctuation production by various super reach and special reach is being performed. You can

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation patterns and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are made to correspond to each other regardless of the game state (during normal operation, time saving, during probability change), but for each game state, The correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be different.

Further, although the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, It is also possible to determine how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted to stop (for example, the front and rear deviated by one symbol) or the like by another variation type counter.

Next, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As illustrated in FIG. 9D, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment, and is exclusively for complete detachment, and the front/rear detachment reach and the front/rear detachment. Other than the common reach that is referred to when a reach is determined and the group (group) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached. To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number that is a big hit, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 stores In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (normal) change pattern table 202d1.

There is a short deviation that does not reach even after a short period (7 seconds) of fluctuation, and a long deviation that does not reach reach but has a longer fluctuation time (10 seconds) than the short deviation. The correlation with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, in common to reach, normal reach types that reach are established but have a variation time of 30 seconds, super reach types that have a variation time of 60 seconds longer than the normal reach types, and variation time of 90 seconds more than the super reach types. And various special reach types are long. Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 149 for various normal reach types, 150 to 197 for various super reach types, and 198 for various special reach types.

FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9E, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, like the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. , It is referred to when the front and rear reach and the reach other than the front and back are determined, and there are various types of normal reach, super reach and special reach. , And the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

To the 1 reserved area (either special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special map 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in the special map 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special map 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of range, the same holding area when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is stored in the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 exclusively for complete deviation is 0-190 for short deviation and 191-198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach, 191 to 197 for various types of super reach, and 198 for various types of special reach.

Since the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is in a time saving state or during a probability change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning a prize at the second ball entrance 640. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there are too many gaps during time saving or sudden change, it will take time until the start of the next fluctuation display, giving the player a waiting state, which may cause player discomfort. There is a nature. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state of probability change, it is configured so that the short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started early, so that the game is played. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from extremely decreasing.

Here, the relationship between the jackpot reliability of the variation pattern and the variation time will be described. The probability that the reach variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c in FIG. 9C is 51/198 for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and various types of super reach (60 seconds). ) Is 129/198, and the special reach (90 seconds) is 19/198. On the other hand, the probability that the reach variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 of FIG. 9E is 191/198 for various normal reach types (30 seconds), Reach types (60 seconds) are 7/198, and special reach types (90 seconds) are 1/198. The ratio of jackpot to off-jacket is 51/191 (=0.267) for normal reach (30 seconds), 129/7 (=18.43) for super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90). Seconds) is 19/1 (=19). This represents the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot reliability. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the greater the variation time, the higher the reliability of the big hit. As a result, the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him/herself, and thus, even if the variation effect period is long, it is possible to make the variation effect with high reliability of the jackpot interesting.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability variation period is from the time the game ball is detected by the probability change start switch 703 until a certain time elapses until the game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707. Since the period is set, it is more advantageous for the player to select a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time because the chance of being drawn with a high probability is increased. In the present embodiment, the variation time is set short for the variation pattern having a low expectation of jackpot, and the variation time is set long for the variation pattern having a low expectation of jackpot, so that the player has a long variation time. By selecting the variation pattern, even if the probability variation period is exhausted a lot, it is possible to suppress the problem of significantly lowering the motivation for the game by performing the game with a degree of expectation for a big hit.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (the presence or absence of a notice display may be selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is configured to be divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but there are a plurality of holding balls even when the game state is normal. In the case of (for example, if there are a maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that the selection may be performed by referring to the out-of-progress (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the variation pattern table for each deviation shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the short deviation and the long deviation are simply regarded as the deviation, and when the deviation is selected, other tables are referred to. Alternatively, the short deviation and the long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, each table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outlying fluctuation pattern table in the probability variation period is constant regardless of the remaining probability variation period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, a relatively short variation pattern is used. Is set in advance, and a variation pattern table with a relatively long variation time is easily selected (for example, a probability that super-reach is selected is high) when a variation pattern table is set for less than a predetermined period. The pattern table may be configured to be easily set.

Furthermore, in the hit determination of the first symbol, in addition to the deviation, the big hit, the small hit is set, and the small hit is elected, and the table for selecting the change pattern from the plurality of change pattern tables is selected by lottery. It may be configured to do so. In this case, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, by changing and setting the selected ratio of the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, even during the probability variation period, a period (variation time Set a period during which a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation pattern is easily selected is selected) and a period in which a player is disadvantageous (a period during which a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected is selected) It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is a counter used for a random lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and for example, increments one by one in the range of 0 to 250. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time point. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. It is acquired and stored in any of the universal figure holding first to fourth areas of the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i provided in the RAM 203.

In the second hit random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that are hits in the normal game state, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-153”, it is determined that the game state is normal when the game state is normal, and the second symbol display device 83 has a stop symbol (the first symbol). (2 symbol), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values to be a hit when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability change is 250, and the range is "1-250". That is, when the value of the obtained second per random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the game state is during the time saving or the probability change, and the second symbol display device 83 is stopped. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than that in the normal state.

In this way, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during the probability change and during the shortening of time than in the normal case. Further, as described above, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that during the normal time, so that the symbol "○" is likely to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the time reduction is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of being a big hit depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is low even in a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the 2nd entrance 640, the 1st entrance It is set higher than when a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

By the way, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 reserved ball storage is made up of four reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas) in which respective counter values are stored for the ball entering the first entrance 63. An area 203a is provided. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) similarly to the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. ..

Each of the holding areas provided in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in the first random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the fluctuation pattern selection counter, respectively. It has a storage area 203a3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. Although not shown, any of the holding areas provided in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has a first random number counter C1 like the respective reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. A storage area for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is provided.

In the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in synchronization with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. The respective values of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the counters in the special figure 1 first reserved area The value is stored. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first area, the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved second area. Store.

When there are two reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first and second areas, the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area. Stores the value of. When there are three reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first to third areas, the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 reserved fourth area. Stores the value of. As a result, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the starting winnings are displayed in the order of the starting winnings to the first ball entrance 64. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 1 reserved third area, and the special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, which is acquired from the counter buffer, is stopped in synchronization with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640. The respective values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. Which of the reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b in which the value of each counter is to be stored is determined by the reserved area stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined in the same manner as in the case of the special sphere 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. As a result, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the starting winnings in the order of the starting winnings to the second ball entrance 640 are set to the special figure 2 reserved first area and the special figure 2 reserved second. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area.

In addition, when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas, when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected, the value of each counter at that time Is discarded without being held. Similarly, when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 reservation first to fourth areas, when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected, the counter of each counter at that time is detected. The value is discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the values of the respective counters can be held up to a maximum of four starting winnings in each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure reservation ball execution area 203c. At the start timing of the variation effect, if the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is held, the first random number counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first random number counter storage area 203c1 and the first hit type provided in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

If there is no hold in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b but there is a hold in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a The respective stored values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. Then, the values of the respective counters stored in the first random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c. Based on, the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b regardless of whether or not the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a holds it. Value is moved to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the fluctuating effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined. Is done. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the start winning in the second ball entrance 640 is prioritized over the starting winning in the first ball entrance 64 in the jackpot lottery, and the variable effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. Is configured.

In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reserved sphere first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, After being moved to the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, the values of the respective counters stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area are then vacant. 2 is shifted to the holding first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special map 1 reserved third area or the special map 2 reserved third area is shifted to the special map 1 reserved second area or the special map 2 reserved second area where the special counter 1 is reserved. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the special figure 1 reserved third area or special figure 2 reserved third area.

As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the values of the respective counters held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second ball entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is held. One area of the storage area 203b is opened. Further, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first ball entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage is performed. One area 203a is opened.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift each piece of data in the holding area (second to fourth) to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of data in each holding area. Data may be shifted only in the holding area in which (values of various counters) are stored (held). For example, the number of variation effects (the number of reserved balls) reserved in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area If the data is stored only in and, after the data in the special figure 1 reserved first area is shifted to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, the data in the special figure 1 reserved second area is transferred to the special figure 1 reserved area. The shift process may be completed by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift processing is not performed for the holding area (in the above example, the special figure 1 holding third to fourth areas) in which data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

The RAM 203 also includes a general map including four reservation areas (universal figure reservation first to fourth areas) in which respective counter values are stored for the passage of a ball in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A reserved ball storage area 203i is provided. Each holding area is a second per random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. It has 203i1.

A second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i in synchronization with the passage timing of the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, if there is no reservation in the universal figure holding sphere storing area 203i and all of the universal figure holding first to fourth areas are empty areas, the second random number counter C2 per second in the universal figure holding area The value of is stored. If there is only one reservation in the universal figure reservation sphere storage area 203a and the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure reservation first area, the second per page random number is stored in the universal figure reservation second area. The value of the counter C4 is stored. If there are two reservations in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure holding first and second areas, the number is stored in the third figure holding area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored. If there are three reservations in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the universal figure holding first to third areas, the number is stored in the fourth figure holding fourth area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored.

As a result, the values of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere in the order in which passage of the sphere is detected by the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 are set to the universal figure holding number. It can be stored in one area, a public figure reservation second area, a public figure reservation third area, and a public figure reservation fourth area. When the value of the second per random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-fourth public area reservation areas, if passage of a sphere is detected in the first or second through gate 67,670, The value of the second random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i, it is stored in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i. Each value of the second winning random number counter C4 is moved to the second winning random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the second hit random number counter storage area 203j1 of the universal figure holding sphere execution area 203j, the winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

Incidentally, when the value of the second random number counter C4 in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i is moved to the public figure holding sphere execution area 203j, it is thereafter stored in the public figure holding second area. Also, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant general-universal-world reservation first area. Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the third figure holding third area is shifted to the empty second figure holding area, and the second random number counter C4 stored in the second figure holding fourth area is stored. It will be shifted to the universal map reservation third area where there is no value.

As a result, when the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second random number counter C4 suspended in the universal symbol retaining sphere storage area 203i, only one symbol is retained normally. 1 area of the universal figure holding ball storage area 203i is opened.

In the pachinko machine 10, when performing data shift processing between the respective holding areas (general drawing holding first to fourth areas) of the public figure holding ball storage area 203i, regardless of whether there is data in each holding area. Instead, each data in the holding area (general-drawing holding second to fourth areas) is configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters are The data may be shifted only for the reserved area in which () is stored (held). For example, the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the universal figure holding first area and the universal figure holding second area. , If the data is stored, after shifting the data of the public figure reservation first area to the public figure reservation ball execution area 203j, the data of the public figure reservation second area is shifted to the public figure reservation first area The shift process may be ended. As a result, since the data shift processing is not performed for the holding area (in the above example, the third-fourth holding areas for the universal figure in the above example) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts should be reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are selected according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as display setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 will be continued. The special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e are the first ball entrances detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) which is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or the number of balls to the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the number of balls to hold the variation effect (variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. This is a counter that counts (the number of times of standby) up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed.

The universal figure holding sphere counter 203f causes the sphere to pass through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on that, up to four times. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (see S1113 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize is detected and the number of balls to be held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the universal figure holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is executed.

The ordinary figure holding ball number counter 203f is configured to be able to hold the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) up to four times at maximum. Further, the second symbol holding lamps 84 (see FIG. 2) corresponding to the number of holding balls indicated by the universal figure holding ball number counter 203f are turned on. As a result, the player is informed of the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the second symbol.

The special figure classification flag 203k, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), which is a special symbol, is to be executed along with the start winning of the first entrance 64, or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether or not the game is executed in accordance with the start winning in 640. When the special figure classification flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed in association with the start winning of the first entrance 64, When the flag 203k is turned on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed along with the start winning in the second ball entrance 640.

This special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF or ON at the initial stage of setting the start of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, and the start to the second ball entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired in association with the winning are held in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b Is shifted to the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure classification flag 203k is set to ON (see FIG. 21).

Further, when the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0, while the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d is If the values of the various counters that are greater than 0 and are acquired in association with the starting winning into the first ball entrance 64 are held in the special map 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of the various counters stored in the special figure 1 reservation first area are shifted to the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF (see FIG. 21).

In the MPU 201, when the jackpot is determined by the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), the jackpot type table (see FIG. 9(b)) used for determining the jackpot type is specially defined. Based on the diagram type flag 203k, either the "first entrance" or the "second entrance" is set. Specifically, when the special figure classification flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed along with the starting winning prize for the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the "first entrance" is set. On the other hand, when the special figure classification flag 203k is turned on, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is to be executed along with the start winning to the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for the “second entrance” is set.

As described above, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot due to the winning in the first entrance 64 is a probability of 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100), and a 1/4 (=25/100). ), it becomes a 15R normal jackpot, and with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), it becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot due to the winning in the second entrance 640 is a probability of 15R probability jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (=50/100), which is 1/4 (=25/100). There is a 15R normal jackpot with a probability, and a 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (=25/100). In other words, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit is that when the ball enters the second entrance port 640, the ball enters the first entrance port 64. Set higher than if.

As described above, the second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 changes according to the open/close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready to enter.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

The probability changing flag 203l is a flag indicating whether the game state is a high probability state (during probability changing) or a low probability state (normal, medium or short). When the probability-during-change flag 203l is on, it indicates a high-probability state (during probability-change), and when the probability-during-change flag 203l is off, it indicates a low-probability state (normal, medium-time saving).

The probability change flag 203l is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned on when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts probability variation (transition to "high probability state") (see FIG. 17). The probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned off when a sphere enters the probability variation end switch 707 and the probability variation ends (transition to "low probability state") (see FIG. 19).

The probability change flag 203l is for the "high probability state" as the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)) used for jackpot determination in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201. Used to determine which to use for the "low probability state". In the jackpot lottery process, when the probability changing flag 203l is on, the "high probability state" is used, so the jackpot probability is 1/30. When the probability variation flag 203l is off, the low probability state is used, and the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, if the probability variation in progress flag 203l is on when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery process, the number of winnings per round of the jackpot game is determined according to the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p described later (see FIG. 23). ).

The probability variation start schedule flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is scheduled to start probability variation. When the MPU 201 determines that a ball has entered the through switch 701 (see FIG. 4) of the probability-changed object 700, the electric tulip 702 is set to open when the probability-change start schedule 203m is on.

The probability change start schedule flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). If the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit mentioned above or 4R probability variation big hit) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (refer to S901 of FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on. When the ball enters the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened by turning on the probability variation start schedule flag 203m (see FIG. 16). A ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703, and when the probability change is started, the probability change start flag 203m is turned off (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the probability variation start flag 203m is set to OFF when detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703, so that a plurality of game balls enter the electric lilip 702 and the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is switched to a plurality of game balls. Even if it passes, it is possible to suppress the problem that the process in which the probability change is set is executed each time.

When the gaming state is the "low probability state", the gaming state remains the "low probability state" even if the probability variation start schedule 203m is turned on. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through switch 701 and the game ball does not enter while the electric tulip 702 is open, the game ball passes through the through switch 701 again, so that the electric The opening of tulips is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect that the probability variation game is not given to the player because the electric tulip 702 was not allowed to enter the ball at the first opening even though the probability variation jackpot was won, and the player is early in the game. You can suppress getting tired of.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, the configuration is kept on until the probability variation starts. However, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, a predetermined time (for example, If the probability change does not start after 10 minutes), the MPU 201 may turn off the probability change start schedule flag 203m. In such a configuration, the player is notified of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, and the player can identify whether the probability variation game is in progress by passing through the through switch 701. It becomes possible to further improve the player's motivation for the game.

The probability-changed object entering ball counter 203n is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the inside of the probability-changeable object 700 (between the probability-change occurrence switch 703 and the probability-change end switch 707). The probability altering object entrance ball counter 203n is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0 to 255.

This probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 0 as an initial value by the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a ball, the MPU 201 increments the probability variation object entrance counter 203n by 1 (see FIG. 17). When the probability variation end switch 707 detects a ball entry, the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 (see FIG. 18). Even if the definite odds object incoming ball counter 203n is decremented by 1, even if the definite odds object incoming ball counter 203n is 1 or more (even if one ball is ejected from the definite odds object 700, the balls are still inside the definite odds object 700). If there is), the probability change is continuously set. On the other hand, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entry, and the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 to 0, which ends the probability variation (see FIG. 19).

In the present embodiment, the probability variation is continued until the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n becomes 0. In other words, the “probability variation longest period” can be determined according to the number of balls entering the probability variation role object 700. Further, in the present embodiment, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be about 361 seconds for each ball entered in the probability variation role object 700. It should be noted that a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. It is configured so that it can be prevented.

As a result, since the “probability change longest period” becomes longer depending on the number of game balls that have entered the electric tulip 702, the player allows more game balls to enter when the electric tulip 702 is opened. Let's shoot a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to consume more game balls and play the game. Further, it is possible to make the electric tulip 702 interested in how many game balls enter, and it is possible to entertain the player in addition to the jackpot.

The probability variation period memory 203o is a memory that sets a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the "angle A1" to the state of "angle A2". The probability variation period memory 203o is used by the MPU 201 to compare the value with a probability variation period measurement counter 203p described later, and determine whether or not the “probability variation longest period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22). ..

In the probability variation period memory 203o, 0 is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Further, when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts a probability variation (transition to “high probability state”), the probability variation period memory 203o stores the probability variation rotor 704 from the state of “angle A1”. A value corresponding to the period during which the probability varying rotator 704 rotates until the state of “angle A2” is set (see FIG. 17). With respect to this set value, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing, so the probability variation period memory 203o corresponds to 360 seconds in the present embodiment. (=360 seconds/(execution interval (2 milliseconds) of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15)) is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the probability variation, the sphere retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Because it is rotated “angle AX” clockwise.

Here, the “angle AX” can be calculated by ““the angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”/(value of the probability varying period memory 203o)”. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” is 0.00166... (=300/180,000) degrees. In other words, the probability variation period memory 203o is used to calculate the “angle AX” that rotates the probability variation rotating body 704 in the clockwise direction at every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts the probability variation (transition to the “high probability state”), the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is changed to “the maximum probability variation period”. Can be set. The time obtained by adding 1 second to the number of seconds corresponding to the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is the "estimation variation maximum period".

The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is a counter that stores an elapsed period from the start of the probability variation. The probability variation period counter 203p is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0 to 65535. The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is used to compare the value with the probability variation period memory 203o and determine whether or not the “maximum probability variation period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22).

The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 when a sphere enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and the MPU 201 starts probability variation (transition to “high probability state”) (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added under a predetermined condition every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). Further, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects a ball entering and the probability variation object incoming ball counter 203n is decremented by 1, if the probability variation object incoming ball counter 203n is 1 or more (the probability variation object 700 is The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 in order to continue the probability variation when one ball is still discharged inside the probability variation auditors object 700) (see FIG. 18). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p can determine whether or not the "maximum probability variation period" exceeds the scheduled period.

The probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation is scheduled to end. When the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is on, it indicates that the probability variation is scheduled to end, and when the probability variation termination scheduled flag 203q is off, it indicates that the probability variation is not scheduled to end.

The probability variation end schedule flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Further, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere and the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n by 1 to 0, the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned on (see FIG. 18). .. Then, when the probability variation ends, the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned off (see FIG. 19).

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a ball and the MPU 201 subtracts 1 from the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n to 0, if the variation effect is changing, the probability variation is immediately changed. It is configured to end the probabilistic change when the change effect is stopped, instead of ending it. That is, the probability variation end schedule flag 203q allows the probability variation to end when the variation effect is stopped, rather than immediately ending the probability variation if the variation effect is changing.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 7A, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as a counter and I/O are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 26) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side around the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 connects various types to these via an input/output port 205. Send commands and control signals.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with a through switch 701, a probability variation generation switch 703, a probability variation rotor motor 704a, and a probability variation end switch 707 of the probability variation object 700 (see FIG. 4).

The MPU 201 determines whether or not each of the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering via the input/output port 205. These switches output an ON signal to the MPU 201 when the ball entering is detected, and output an OFF signal to the MPU 201 when the ball entering is not detected. The MPU 201 detects the entry of a ball in a switch reading process (see FIG. 16) described later.

The MPU 201 can control the target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), the rotation direction, and the rotation speed of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a via the input/output port 205. Further, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability variable rotating body motor 704a.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is reached. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

With reference to FIG. 10, the operation of the certainty modification object 700 controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. 10: is the figure which showed typically the operation|movement of the certainty altering thing 700 arrange|positioned at the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG.10(a) is a schematic diagram immediately after the probability variation start (at the time of probability variation start). 10(b) is a schematic diagram during the probability change (during the probability change period), and FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram immediately before the end of the probability change.

As shown in FIG. 10A, immediately after the jackpot game is over, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 causes the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotating body 704 to be below the route 703a of the probability variation generation switch 703 (below the route 703b). It has been stopped to be in position. Here, the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1 (see FIG. 11A)”. The gaming state after the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 is first set to the "low probability state". Here, if the executed jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON (see S907 in FIG. 23). After the jackpot game, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, referred to as "right hitting"), so that the ball enters the through switch 701. Then, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, the electric tulip 702 is opened by the MPU 201.

Next, when a sphere enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the arrival of the sphere, the MPU 201 closes the electric tulip 702, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At this time, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is transited to the "high probability state". The sphere detected by the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 and flows down the path outlet 703b. At this time, since the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is in the state of “angle A1” and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is located below the path outlet 703b, the ball receiving portion 704b is accurately changed. The ball detected by the generation switch 703 stays (that is, the ball stays at the position B in FIG. 10A). For a predetermined time (1 second) after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the sphere receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is maintained in a state of being stopped at the "angle A1" (see S803 in FIG. 22). ).

Next, when a predetermined time (1 second) elapses after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the rotation angle is specified to the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704, and the sphere of the probability variation rotor 704 is designated. The receiving portion starts to rotate in the clockwise direction around the probability variable rotating body motor 704a. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation period advancing processing (see S702 in FIG. 22), the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing. The “angle AX” (which is the same angle each time) is rotated (see S805 in FIG. 22). That is, the sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated by the probability varying rotating body motor 704a of the probability varying rotating body 704 in a clockwise direction to move to the ball discharging portion 706 at a constant speed.

FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram when a predetermined time (for example, 130 seconds) elapses after the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotating body 704 starts rotating clockwise during the probability variation. The sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is moving while the ball receiving portion 704b rotates at a constant speed by the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. (See B in FIG. 10B). This is because the MPU 201 rotates the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotator 704 clockwise (the same angle each time) “angle AX” at every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” rotates the 315 degrees in 360,000 ms because the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates about 315 degrees in 360 seconds and rotates to a position overlapping the ball discharging portion 706. Therefore, it is approximately 0.00175 degrees from 315/180,000 in 2 ms.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram just before the end of the probability change. From FIG. 10B, after a further predetermined time has elapsed, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are in a state of overlapping (the ball receiving portion of the probability varying rotating body 704 is “angle A2”). State). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. Since the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 704b is inclined toward the ball discharging portion 706, when the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. To be done. This sphere flows down the path 707a below the sphere discharge unit 706, and is detected by the probability change end switch 707. The sphere B in FIG. 10(c) is the moment when it is discharged from the ball receiving portion 704b from the ball discharging portion 706. When the probability change end switch 707 detects the probability change end process (see FIG. 19), the probability change ends.

In the normal state in which the gaming state is the “low probability state” in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 more easily than the second ball entrance 640. As a route in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance 64, the game is performed by "left hitting" in which the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

When a big hit occurs, the variable winning device 65 arranged in the lower center of the game area and the variable winning device 650 arranged on the right side of the game area are changed so that the game balls can be entered. Digest the jackpot game with "right hitting" to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80, which is a route that allows the game ball to enter both the variable winning device 650. To do.

After the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the "low probability state" during the time saving. If the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the electric tulip 702. This is because the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on when the probability variation big hit occurs (see FIG. 23). In this state, when the game ball is inserted into the electric tulip 702, the game state shifts to the “high probability state” (during probability change) based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703.

The sphere that has passed through the probability variation generation switch 703 is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, and is guided at a constant speed to the sphere discharging portion 706 that is guided to the probability variation end switch 707. The probability variation period is the longest period after the probability variation starts until the probability variation ends without a big hit in the probability variation (in the present embodiment, only one game ball enters the electric tulip 702). 361 seconds when a ball is thrown). During this period, the probability variation period (time) does not change regardless of the number of times the variation effect is executed. When the ball enters the probability change end switch 707, the game state shifts to the time saving of the “low probability state”. During the time saving, the second entrance 640 is easier to enter than the first entrance 64, so the player plays "right hit" until the time is over.

As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) described later, the sphere retained in the receiving portion 704b rotates the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation end switch 707 passes the game ball. Is detected, and the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation effect period is set to be longer as the variation effect having a high jackpot reliability is high (for example, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The variable effect period for the outlier is 7 seconds, while the variable effect period for the special reach is 90 seconds). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, during the probability change, if a variation pattern having a high reliability of a big hit and a long variation effect period (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) is executed among the variation patterns described with reference to FIG. 9, There is a demerit for the player that many of the limited probability variation periods pass without a new lottery being executed due to the variable effect period. However, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern having a long variation effect period is set to have a high jackpot reliability (a probability of being selected when the lottery result is a jackpot rather than being out of the jackpot). Can have a high expectation for a big hit, and can play a game without worrying about a long variation production period. Therefore, the excitement of the player playing the game can be increased, and the player can be prevented from getting tired early.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the variation pattern in which the variation effect period that is executed is long is incorrect, the probability variation period is unnecessarily long as in the configuration in which the probability variation period is determined by the number of times the variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

In addition, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, more chances for jackpot lottery are left, and thus more chances for lottery in a high probability state can be given to the player.

In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. Therefore, the player can predict the time until the end of the probability variation period by recognizing the remaining probability variation period in an analog manner, and select the variation pattern of the short variation time so that more lottery opportunities can be obtained. It is possible to play a game with the expectation that a jackpot is obtained. Therefore, the player can improve the interest in the game.

With reference to FIGS. 11(a) to 11(d), the operation of the probability altering object 700 will be described. FIGS. 11A to 11D show the relationship between the angle of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 of the probability varying object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram when a big hit is not made during the probability change, FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram when a big hit is made during the probability change, and FIG. 11C is a probability change target object. FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram in the case where two balls have entered, and FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram in the case where the probability-changing rotating body of the probability-changing compound object stops during the probability change.

First, with reference to FIG. 11A, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the big hit does not occur during the probability variation will be described. At ta0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At ta0, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

The ta1 o'clock is 1 second after ta0 o'clock, and is the time when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (FIG. 10(a)). reference)).

The ta2 o'clock is a time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the ta1 o'clock, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is driven by the probability varying rotor motor 704a for a predetermined time (this embodiment). Then, every one second) is rotating at a constant speed by a predetermined angle. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B).

At ta3 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from ta2 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the time (ta1 to ta3) from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other is 360. Seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at a constant speed together with the ball receiving portion 704b. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variable process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Because it is rotated clockwise by “angle AX”.

Ta4 o'clock is almost the same as ta3 o'clock, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At ta4, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After ta4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by ta5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after ta4 o'clock, The ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the "angle A1" state. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, at ta4, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second".

During the period during the probability change (the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00), the lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used. The “probability variation longest period”, which is the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00, is about 361 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation in the case of a big hit during the probability variation will be described. Time tb0 is the same as time ta0 in FIG. The time tb1 is the same as the time ta1 in FIG. The time from tb1 to tb2 is the same as the time from ta1 to ta2 in FIG.

At tb2, the sphere staying in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is being rotated together with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed by the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B). FIG. 11B shows a state in which the variation effect, which is a big hit at tb2, is stopped. When the variation effect which is a big hit stops, thereafter, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A2” (S720 in FIG. 21), and 0.5 from tb2. By tb3 when the second elapses, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. At tb2, the current angle “angle A3” of the probability varying rotor motor 704a is acquired from (the motor driver of) the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. For example, when the probability variable rotating body 704 forms a clockwise angle of 200 degrees from the “angle A3” state to the “angle A2” state, at tb2, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor of the probability varying rotor 704 to rotate. The MPU 201 controls the probability varying rotor 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at “speed of 400 degrees per second clockwise” to the motor driver 704a. To do.

The time tb4 is almost the same as the time tb3, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At this time, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). After tb4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of "angle A1", and by tb5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after tb4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 becomes "angle". The state becomes “A1”. The control of the variable probability rotating body 704 by the MPU 201 from tb4 to tb5 is the same as from ta4 to ta5 in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the two balls enter the probability varying object 700 will be described. At time tc0, the ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first game ball. The electric tulip 702 is closed at tc0, but before the closing, another ball (second ball) has entered the electric tulip 702. At tc0, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A1” state. At this time, the probability change is started by the probability change start process (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added to the probability-changeable object entrance ball counter 203n that stores the number of balls that have entered inside the probability-changeable object 700 (between the probability change generation switch 703 and the probability change end switch 707) (see FIG. 17). (See S301).

The time tc1 is the time when one second has elapsed from the time tc0, and is the time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)). Since another ball (the second ball) has entered the electric tulip 702, from tc0 to tc1, the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, and the probability change occurs. One is added to the accessory entrance ball counter 203n (see S301 in FIG. 17). At the time of tc1, the value of the probability altering substance entrance ball counter 203n is 2.

At tc2, 360 seconds have elapsed from tc1, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the period from tc1 o'clock to tc2 o'clock, the first sphere is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and rotates at a constant speed around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. There is. On the other hand, the second ball is a path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, and is stopped by a portion other than the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 (a boundary portion between the ball receiving portion 704b and the path 703a).

At tc3 o'clock, it is almost the same as tc2 o'clock, and the first ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is switched by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be detected. After tc3 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S504 in FIG. 18), and by tc4 o'clock 0.5 seconds after tc3 o'clock, The probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”. Note that at tc3, the value of the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entry into the probability variation end switch 707 (see S501 of FIG. 18), so the value of the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is 1. Is.

Here, in the present embodiment, even when the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball, the gaming state shifts from the high-probability state to the low-probability state if the value of the probability-changed object entering ball counter 203n is not 0. However, the high probability state (probability change) is maintained. Therefore, when two or more game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the high probability state can be maintained until all the entered game balls are detected by the probability change end switch 707.

At tc4, the second ball stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

At tc5 o'clock, 0.5 seconds have elapsed from tc4 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is started to rotate clockwise by the probability varying rotor motor 704a (FIG. 10(a )reference)). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 based on the fact that the ball has entered the probability variation ending switch 707 at tc3 (see S505 in FIG. 18). Then, from tc3 to tc4, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) (see FIG. 22). At tc5, which is 1 second after tc3, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p becomes 500 (corresponding to 1 second) (see FIG. 22). As a result, at tc5, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 22).

At tc6 o'clock, 360 seconds have elapsed from tc5 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball ejecting portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. During a period from tc5 o'clock to tc6 o'clock, the second sphere is retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of the certainty varying rotor 704, and the certainty varying rotor motor 704a of the certainty varying rotor 704 moves together with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed. It's spinning.

At tc7 o'clock, it is almost the same as tc6 o'clock, and the second ball stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be done. At tc7, the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) ends the probability variation. After tc 7 o'clock, the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the “angle A1” state, and by tc 8 the probability varying rotor 704 is in the “angle A1” state. The “maximum probability variation period”, which is the period from tc 0 o'clock to tc 7 o'clock, is about 722 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. That is, even if the probability-changed object entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entry into the probability-change occurrence switch 703, if the probability-changed object entrance ball counter 203n is 1 or more (one ball is ejected from the probability-change object 700). Even if it is performed, if the sphere still exists inside the probability altering compound 700), the probability variation is configured to continue (see S504 to S506 in FIG. 18). Thereby, even if a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability variation period can be extended in proportion to the number of the game balls that entered. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of inserting more game balls into the electric tulip 702, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The process according to the number of balls that entered the probability variation generation switch 703 is not limited to this. If there are two or more balls that entered the probability variation generation switch 703, for example, probability variation is started. After that, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 22) so that only one sphere exists inside the probability varying object 700 in one second. It may be configured to discharge one or more balls from the ball discharging unit 706. Specifically, during the 1 second, until the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 1, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves back and forth between the "angle A1" state and the "angle A2" state. It is configured to control the rotating body motor 704a. Further, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which only one ball enters the probability change generation switch 703. Specifically, immediately above the probability change generation switch 703, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked is provided. In the state where the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked, a route for guiding the blocked ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. Then, when a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 allows the ball on the path 703a to pass through, and then blocks the ball on the path 703a for 10 seconds, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability change is continued until all the game balls are detected by the probability change end switch 707, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Based on the fact that the first ball game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707, the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, the ball receiving portion 702 is rotated at high speed, and the remaining game balls are discharged. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the probability variation period can always be made constant, and the gambling property can be made constant. Further, the probability variation period may be continued up to a predetermined number of game balls, not limited to one ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11D, a case will be described in which the rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 of the probability varying object 700 is stopped (is stopped) during the probability variation. For example, during the probability variation, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates. Suppose it is stopped. As long as the rotation of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is stopped, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. In other words, there is a problem that the probability variation period is continued longer than usual because the probability variation ending switch 707 does not detect a ball that is retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

In addition, for example, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, Even if the magnet is applied to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended. However, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the means for preventing the illegal act, there is an effect that the probability change can be prevented from being illegally extended. A means for preventing the probability variation from being illegally extended will be described with reference to FIG.

At td0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At td0, the probability variation period memory 203o is set with a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the probability variation rotating body 704 to the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, 180000 (=360 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds)) corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Further, at td0, the probability variation period is measured. The counter 203p is set to 0. During the probability variation, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 in the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22) at every execution interval (2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt processing.

The time td1 is one second after td0, and is the time when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise by the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10(a)). ). At td1, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 (corresponding to 1 second).

The time td2 is when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time td1, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. I am in the middle of doing it. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B). At this time td2, the probability varying rotor motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the probability varying rotor 704 stops rotating. After td2, the probability varying rotating body 704 continues to stop at "angle A3". However, in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22), the probability variation is configured to end when the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o.

The time td3 is 241 seconds after td2, and the time td3 is 362 seconds after td0. At td3, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 181000 (corresponding to 362 seconds). Since the value of the probability variation period memory 203o is 180,000 (corresponding to 360 seconds) and the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation ends at td3 (Fig. 22 S807).

For example, during the probability variation, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a fails, or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 is stopped. Assume As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to be stopped, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. As a result, the probability change can be illegally extended. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a means for preventing this fraudulent action (finishing the probability change at the time td3 described above (see FIG. 22)), it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended. .. Further, for example, during the probability change, it is illegal to discharge the ball retained in the ball receiving part 704b to the route 707a in a state where the ball receiving part 704b of the probability changing rotating body 704 and the ball discharging part 706 overlap each other. For the purpose of prevention, even if a fraudulent act is made outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 and the magnet is applied to the front surface side of the ball discharging portion 706, a means for preventing the fraudulent act (previous change at td3 described above). End (see FIG. 22)), it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended.

In the present embodiment, the probability variation end switch 707 is set so that the probability variation ends when the game ball is detected, and the probability variation end switch 707 does not detect the game ball even after a predetermined time has elapsed. In the embodiment, the probability variation is forcibly ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the means for setting the probability variation to be ended in a predetermined time in advance and notifying the player of the time is the present embodiment. It may be configured to perform an effect using a game ball as described above. With such a configuration, fraud can be further prevented.

<Regarding the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 that controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input/output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input/output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. While receiving from 113, the display control device 114 sends a display command to the voice lamp control device 113 for notifying the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input/output port 238 via the bus line 240. The video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different jackpot winning probability or the number of prize balls paid out in one big jackpot, a model having exactly the same design configuration as that displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a model. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. Further, the ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is stored in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 identifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads it. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, Display data tables corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

Incidentally, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variable effect was stopped, While the third symbol, which is the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The fixed display effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving a fixed command from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. .. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is any of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. A performance is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

In the restart effect, when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, It is an effect to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swinged) around a predetermined position on the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation effect of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. You can recognize that.

The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect. The fluctuation display data table, which is the display data table for fluctuation effect, is prepared one table at a time according to the combination of the fluctuation effect pattern and the stop pattern that are set. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect, a fixed symbol for a deviation symbol as a stop symbol, a fixed probability jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot) for confirmation display, and a normal jackpot (15R normal) Jackpot) is displayed and confirmed.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since the display data table for change is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This rear surface type is one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the "sea stage", "palace stage", and "deep sea stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. And information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to C. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the state of the state corresponding to the back side type The display state information indicating whether to display the back image may be defined. The back image is displayed with the display range, brightness, and color tone changing with the passage of time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the initial state indicated by the display status information is displayed.

The display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. May be. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started Identify.

Further, the display state information is, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time after the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display on the third symbol display device 81), or the type information of the display state information together with the back surface type and the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether or not it is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of (displaying) is started) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address in which a rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each. For example, "0" is attached to the main symbol as an identification number, "1" is attached to the sub symbol between "0" and "1" as an identification number, and the main symbol of "1" is attached. “2” is attached to the symbol as an identification number, and “3” is attached to the sub symbol between “1” and “2” as the identification number. In this way, the sub-symbols are also given different identification numbers depending on the position where the sub-symbol is inserted (which main symbol is between them).

Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation effect until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the variation effect performed one time ago. Offset information with the identification number of the stop symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the variation effect performed one time ago. This is because it changes depending on the stop design. From the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed, as the symbol type information in each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

As the symbol type information, from the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before, the predetermined time when the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed is switched to is the third symbol at high speed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, at some addresses, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The display contents defined in this display data table are used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Then, the pointer 233b is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the voice output device 226 to output a voice that matches the display content notified by the display command.

When a plurality of display contents are defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the previously defined display contents, and the display command is generated. Send to 113.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, a time counter 233d, an effect permission flag 233e, and a changing flag 233f.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The display data table thus selected is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233b one by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the voice output device 226 to output a voice that matches the display content notified by the display command.

The pointer 233b is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content should be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233b to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame (S2702 in FIG. 30). (See), the value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233b is updated as described above, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 14). As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 14, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored is described, and the image controller 237 includes a character (described later) provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to scaling processing according to a magnification rate, rotation processing according to a rotation angle, and translucency according to a translucency value. Processing was performed, synthesis processing with other sprites was performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing was performed according to color information, and filtering processing was performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. An image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a to draw the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold sphere count symbol). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. , And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233d is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 ( Each time (see S2702 of FIG. 30) is executed, the clock counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The production permission flag 233e is a flag indicating whether the production is permitted by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. When the production permission flag 233e is on, the production is permitted, and when the production permission flag 233e is off, the production is not permitted.

The effect permission flag 233e is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). After the performance permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, when the display control device 114 receives the performance permission command, the performance permission flag 233e is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). In the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 231, it is used to determine whether or not to display the effect. The effect is displayed from the time when the effect permission flag 233e is turned on.

The changing flag 233f is a flag indicating whether the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing. When the changing flag 233f is on, the change effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing, and when the changing flag 233f is off, the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is not changing. ..

The changing flag 233f is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). In the voice lamp controller 113, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and is transmitted to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the variation flag 233f is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). Further, after the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, when the confirmation command is received by the display control device 114, the changing flag 233f is turned off (see S2805 in FIG. 31). The changing flag 233f is used to determine whether or not the changing effect is being generated. When the changing flag 233f is ON, the drawing effect of the display control device 114 (S2704 in FIG. 30) causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the changing effect corresponding to the display change pattern command. When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30).

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a design (background design or decorative design) displayed on the third design display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in a compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In this embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having a frame buffer area for storing one frame image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for two frames.

The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and at the same time, the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read-out image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 through the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. The processing is performed according to the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing the image data for all the sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data of one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data of the one frame previously written is read from the one frame buffer area, while the other The image data for the next one frame is written in the frame buffer area.

Thus, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

<Regarding control processing in main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 26. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, the probability variation end command, the probability variation abnormal command, and the production permission, which are set in the variation process (see FIG. 21) and the variation start process (see FIG. 23) that is one process of the variation process. A command or the like is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the sphere emission signal set when the sphere is emitted in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of a big hit state, the specific winning openings (large opening openings) 65a and 650a of the variable winning award devices 65 and 650. A large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing is performed (S103). That is, it is determined whether the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning openings 65a, 650a has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a. To do. Then, if any of these conditions is established, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, both the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 650a are configured to be opened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and either the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened. One of them may be opened. The specific winning opening to be opened may be determined by the type of jackpot, the jackpot pattern, a predetermined lottery, or the like, and the specific winning opening to be opened may be switched for each round.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is held in the universal figure holding sphere storage area 203i as the sphere passes through the second entrance gate (through gate) 267, The value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the public figure holding first area of the public figure holding sphere storage area 203i is shifted to the public figure holding sphere execution area 203j. At this time, each of the reservations is held in the following manner: public figure hold second area → public figure hold first area, public figure hold third area → public figure hold second area, public figure hold fourth area → public figure hold third area. The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

When the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the universal figure holding ball execution area 203j matches the winning random number value, a lottery (winning lottery) is performed, and the winning random number value matches. Is, as a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), after performing the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, and after the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed. , The electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the universal figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the random number value of the hit, as a deviation of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), After performing the variable display of the second symbol on the 2 symbol display device 83, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a remains closed.

It should be noted that the winning random number values are set to different numbers depending on whether the game state is normal, during a time saving period, or during a probability change. That is, there are 149 random number values that are hits in the normal gaming state, and the values are "5-153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined that the game state is a win when the game state is normal. On the other hand, the number of random number values to be a hit when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability change is 250, and the range is "1-250". In other words, when the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the player is in a winning position when the gaming state is in the time saving or the probability changing state.

Further, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a probability variation than in the normal state. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined that the second symbol (ordinary symbol) hits is released for a longer time when the gaming state is in a time saving state or during a certain variation.

In this way, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during the probability change and during the shortening of time than in the normal case. Further, as described above, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter than that during the normal time, so that the symbol "○" is likely to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the time reduction is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change and during the shortening of the working time, compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of being a big hit depending on whether the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is low even in a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of a 15R certainty variation jackpot being selected as a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit is when the ball enters the 2nd entrance 640, the 1st entrance It is set higher than when a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for ball entry.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory that accompanies the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. A ball is shot toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and by entering the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Aiming to achieve a 15R certainty variation jackpot by shooting a ball toward the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting") and entering the second ball entrance 640 toward However, it is advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). The switch reading process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented, and their counter values are the maximum values. (In the present embodiment, when it reaches 899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively), it is cleared to 0 respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 or It is read as an initial value of the second per random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, the processing for displaying by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109). Next, the start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, the switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this switch reading processing (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to mainly enter the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 which form the probability variation object 700. This is processing for detecting and executing processing according to the detection, and processing for reading the input states of various switches connected to the main control device 110.

When the switch reading process is executed, it is first determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S200). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S200: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. Since the pachinko machine 10 does not transition the game state to the probability change during the jackpot, the ball enters the switch (through switch 701, probability change generation switch 703, probability change end switch 707) of the probability change object 700 that can change the game state. There is no need to distinguish between big hits. Even if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON by the process of S200, the process of opening the electric tulip 702 is not executed, and the game ball does not enter the electric tulip 702 until the jackpot game ends. Can be set to

If it is not a big hit (S200: No), it is detected whether the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201). Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on in order to determine whether or not the electric tulip 702 should be opened. Yes (S202). If it is determined that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S202: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (the electric accessory 702a is opened) (S203), and the process proceeds to S204.

As a result, the game ball can enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the probability variation start schedule 203m is off (S202: No), the process proceeds to S204. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in the open state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball does not enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. .. If the probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit mentioned above or 4R probability variation big hit mentioned above) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 of FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on (see S907 of FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by inserting the ball into the through switch 701 after the jackpot game is over after the probability variation jackpot is determined (the gaming state is during the time saving of the "low probability state"), and the electric tulip 702 can be opened. It becomes possible to insert a ball into the probability change generation switch 703 inside the tulip 702. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S201: No), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, in the processing of S204, it is determined whether or not the probability variation generation switch 703 has detected a game ball (S204). Then, when the probability variation generation switch 703 determines that a game ball has been detected (S204: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S205), the probability variation start processing (S206) is executed, and S207 is executed. Process shifts to. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. (For example, up to 4) The probability variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S204: No), the process proceeds to S207.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the electric tulip 702 is opened, the open state is maintained until the probability change generation switch 703 detects the game ball, so the player surely plays the electric tulip 702 with the game ball. Can be entered. In addition, even if there are few remaining balls, even if the game ball cannot be inserted into the electric tulip 702, the game ball can be inserted into the electric tulip 702 after purchase, so that the player It is possible to prevent the person from getting impatient.

Next, in the process of S207, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball (S207). When it is determined that the probability variation end switch 707 detects the game ball (S207: Yes), the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) is executed. Note that the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S209), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. If is not changing (S209: No), the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211. The probability variation ending process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: Yes), the process proceeds to S211.

Here, in the process of S209, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209), and it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation ending process (S210). Explain why.

For example, during the probability change, immediately before the variation effect is stopped, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”, and the game balls that are parked in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 are equal to or less than the ball discharging portion 706. It is assumed that the probability variation end switch 707 flows down the path 707a and is detected, that is, "a situation in which the probability variation seems to have finished just before the stop of the variation effect". In this case, the player may be confused as to whether the jackpot probability of the fluctuation effect is the probability of probability change or the probability of normal change. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the probability variation end switch 707 has detected the game ball (S207: Yes), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: In the case of Yes), in the switch reading process, the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed, and the probability variation end process (S210) is not executed.

In the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21), after the fluctuation stops (S717), the probability change end process (S210) is executed. In the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19), the probability variation ending command is set (S403 in FIG. 19). Thereafter, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation end command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2808 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation end” on the third symbol display device 81 (see S2809 in FIG. 31). ), the player recognizes the end of the probability change by visually recognizing the display of “end of probability change”.

That is, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball, the probability variation is not ended while the variation effect is changing, and the probability variation is terminated after the variation effect is stopped and the player is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-mentioned “situation in which it seems that the probabilistic change has finished just before the stop of the variable effect”.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is not changing (S209: No), is the probability of the next big jackpot of the fluctuating effect being the probability of being changing, even if the changing is finished at that time? Since there is no confusion as to whether the probability is normal, the probability variation end process (S210) is executed immediately after the probability change end scheduled process (S208) is executed to end the probability change.

By configuring in this manner, the probability of variation in the special symbol, that is, the period during which the lottery opportunity is not given, is extended to extend the probability variation period, thereby changing the predetermined payout rate or the like of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress defects. In addition, since the end of the probability change is set at an easily understandable timing, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Next, in the process of S211, other processes are executed (S211), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. In the process of S211, the process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In the present embodiment, when the first symbol (special symbol) is changing, the probability variation is not ended, but the probability variation is terminated after the first symbol is stopped (configuration that delays the completion of the probability variation). However, without being limited thereto, the probability change may be configured to end even when the first symbol is changing. In this case, by delaying and displaying the display mode indicating the end of the probability change until the fluctuation of the first symbol is stopped, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is confused. Further, with such a configuration, the probability variation period can be made constant, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Next, the probability variation start processing (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the probability variation start process (S206). The probability variation start process (S206) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation start process is performed based on the ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703. Is a process for starting.

When the probability variation start processing (FIG. 17, S206) is executed, first, 1 is added to the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n that counts the number of game balls entered in the electric tulip 702 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the probability variation start processing is ended.

If the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned off (S303). Next, a value corresponding to the probability variation period is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S304). In the present embodiment, 180000 (=360 seconds/(timer) corresponding to 360 seconds, which is a period during which the probability varying rotor 704 rotates from the state of the angle A1 to the state of the angle A2. The execution interval of the interrupt process (2 milliseconds) is set, then 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S305), the probability variation in progress flag 203l is turned on (S306), and the probability variation start process is ended. ..

Here, the process of S304 to S306 is a process of transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to a probability change. In the process of S306, the game state transits from a low probability state (time saving state) to a high probability state (probably changing). After that, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used for the jackpot determination is for the “high probability state”.

Here, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is off (S303) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703. This is to execute the process of transitioning to the probability change only when the first ball is entered. That is, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first sphere, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, so that all the processes of S301 to S306 are executed. Next, when the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned off (S303), so the processes of S301 and S302 are executed, and the processes of S303 to S306. Is not executed. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change generation switch 703, the probability change can be normally started.

<Scheduled end scheduled processing>
Next, the probability variation end scheduled processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the probability variation end schedule processing (S208). The probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707, This is a process of scheduling the probability change end.

When the probability variation end scheduled processing (FIG. 18, S208) is executed, first, the probability variation accessory entrance ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S502). If the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is determined to be 0 (S502: Yes), there is no ball entering the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). Therefore, the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) turns on the probability variation ending schedule flag 203q to end the probability variation (S503), terminates the probability variation ending schedule process, and returns to the switch reading process. As a result, when the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is executed next, the probability variation ends.

When it is determined in S502 that the probability variation object entrance ball counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S502: No), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the "angle A1" (S504). .. Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S505), a value corresponding to the probability variation period (180000 corresponding to 360 seconds) is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S506), and the probability variation ending scheduled process is ended. Return to the switch reading process.

Here, the process of S504 to S506 is not a process of scheduling the end of the probability variation, but the "longest period of the probability variation" is doubled or tripled according to the number of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703. Is a process for The processing of S504 to S506 is executed when the probability variation generation switch 703 has a plurality of balls. When there are a plurality of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703, since the balls are retained in the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S504), the ball that has been stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. One second after S506 is executed, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) causes the probability variation rotating body 704 to start rotating clockwise (see FIG. 11(c)).

It should be noted that when the processing of S504 is executed, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704” is 300 degrees, in the process of S504, the MPU 201 changes the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the processing of S504. Here, the time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) required to turn the probability varying rotating body 704 counterclockwise to the state of “angle A1” is also included in the probability varying period, and the probability variation set during that time is also included. Since the value of the period measurement counter 203p has been updated, the processing for rotating the "angle AX" is executed after the probability variable rotating body 704 has moved to the position of the "angle A1" and stopped for 0.5 seconds. .. Thereby, even when the probability variation period is doubled or tripled, it can be set constantly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that variations occur in the probability variation period.

<Probability change end processing>
Next, the probability variation ending process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the probability variation ending process (S210). The probability variation ending process (S210) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation ending switch 707 receives the probability change. Is a process of terminating. Further, the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed even after the variation is stopped in the variation process (see FIG. 21). When a ball entering the probability variation end switch 707 is detected, if it is changing, in the variation process (see FIG. 21), after the variation stops, the probability variation end process (S210) ends the probability variation, and the third symbol “Probability change end” is displayed on the display device 81. As a result, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-mentioned "situation in which it seems that the probabilistic change has finished just before the stop of the variable effect".

When the probability variation end process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is on (S401). The probability variation end schedule flag 203q is turned on in the probability variation termination schedule process (see FIG. 18). If it is determined in the process of S401 that the probability variation ending schedule 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S401: No), the probability variation ending process is terminated. As described above, when the probability variation ending schedule flag 203q is not on, the probability variation is not terminated even if the probability variation ending process is executed. As a result, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21), even if the probability variation end process (S210) is executed after the fluctuation has stopped, if the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is off, the probability variation is not ended.

If it is determined that the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is on (S401: Yes), the probability variation termination schedule flag 203q is turned off (S402), the probability variation end command is set (S403), and the probability variation in progress flag is turned off (S404). ), and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” (S405), and the probability variation ending process is ended. In the processing of S404, the game state transitions from a high probability state (during probability change) to a low probability state, a time saving state (time saving). After that, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the one for the “low probability state” is used as the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used to determine the jackpot.

When the probability variation ending process is executed, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, in the process of S405, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to perform the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the processing of S405. Thereby, the probability variation period can be set to be constant.

By the processing of S405, since the probability variation rotating body 704 is set to the state of “angle A1” at the end of the probability variation, the sphere detected by the probability variation generation switch 703 is the probability variation when the sphere enters the probability variation object 700 next time. Since it flows down the path 703a below the generation switch 703 and can be received by the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704, the probability varying rotor 704 can be rotated thereafter every one second, and the probability variation period is reduced to the player. It can be informed easily.

<Starting prize processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the starting winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S110). The start winning process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and starts. When a prize is won, a process of holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process of counting the number of reserved balls are executed.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variable effect due to the start prize to the first ball entrance 64) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S602). Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, a variation effect associated with the starting prize in the first ball entrance 64 is produced. If the number of reserved balls NA<4 is not satisfied (S602: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA<4 in the variable effect associated with the starting prize in the first ball entrance 64 is <4 (S602: Yes). The value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA) is incremented by 1 (S603), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S604).

In the subsequent process of S605, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) (S605). Here, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S605: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variation effect associated with the start prize to the second ball entrance 640) It is determined whether the number of reserved balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S606). Then, whether or not there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S605: No), or even if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640, the variation effect associated with the starting winning in the second ball entrance 640 If the number of reserved balls NB<4 is not satisfied (S606: No), the start winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S605: Yes) and the number of reserved balls NB<4 in the variable effect associated with the starting prize in the second ball entrance 640 is <S460: Yes. Then, the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203 (reserved sphere number NB) is incremented by 1 (S607), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S608). Then, the start winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

<Variation processing>
Next, the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S109). This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S701). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated.

If it is not a big hit (S701: No), the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed. Note that the probability variation period progress processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S703), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is not changing (S703: No). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S704). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S704: No), the present process ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S704, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S704: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started, First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 number-of-reserved balls counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect associated with the start winning in the second ball entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S705). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e (reserved sphere number NB) is greater than 0 (S705: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e (reserved sphere number NB ) Is decremented by 1 (S706), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S707).

In this data shift processing, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, and the special figure 2 Reservation 2nd area → special map 2 reservation 1st area, special map 2 reservation 3rd area → special map 2 reservation 2nd area, special map 2 reservation 4th area → special map 2 reservation 3rd area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

After the data shift process, the special figure classification flag 203k is set to ON (S708), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) that starts from now on is accompanied by the start winning of the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the variation start process (S709) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As a result of the processing of S705, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding ball number NB) is not greater than 0, that is, the holding ball number NB is 0, and the starting winning award to the second ball entrance 640. If it is determined that there is no variation effect that has been withheld (S705: No), then the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203d (the hold ball of the variation effect that accompanies the start winning into the first entrance 64). It is determined whether (number NA) is larger than 0 (S710).

As a result, the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the holding ball number NA is 0, and it is held with the start winning in the first ball entrance 64. If it is determined that there is no variation effect (S710: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA) is larger than 0 (S710: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d (reserved sphere number NA). Is subtracted by 1 (S711), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203d is shifted (S712).

This data shift processing shifts the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a to the special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, and Reservation 2nd area → special map 1 reservation 1st area, special map 1 reservation 3rd area → special map 1 reservation 2nd area, special map 1 reservation 4th area → special map 1 reservation 3rd area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

After the data shift process, the special figure classification flag 203k is set to OFF (S713), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) that starts from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to S709, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed (S709), and this process is ended.

In this variation process, when the variation effect can be started (S704: Yes), it is first confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S705). ), if the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, if the variation effect associated with the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is held (S705: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding-ball-counter 203d, that is, regardless of whether or not the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. The variation effect is started based on the data (each counter value). As a result, the starting winning in the second entrance 640 is configured so that the jackpot lottery is prioritized over the starting winning in the first entrance 64 and the variation effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. There is.

In the process of S703, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S714). The display time during change of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time is If it has not elapsed (S714: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S715), and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LEDs 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, the currently lit LED is red. If so, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed (S714: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S716). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S709) described later with reference to FIG.

That is, in the process of S709, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it is a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (probability variation jackpot that makes it easier to enter the ball into the probability variation generation switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state after the maximum round number 15 round jackpot), 4R probability variation jackpot (after the maximum round number of four rounds jackpot, probability variation jackpot that makes it easier to enter the ball into the probability variation occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state) or 15R normal jackpot (maximum round After the jackpot of 15 rounds, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a jackpot that is in a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the 4R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue color when the 15R regular jackpot is hit. Turn on the LED and. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S716, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. A confirmation command is set for confirmation in synchronization with lighting (S717), and the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is executed (S210). Upon receiving the confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the confirmation command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

The probability variation end process (S210) is also executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability change is performed based on the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707. This is the processing to end. Further, the probability variation ending process (S210) is executed even after the variation effect is stopped in the variation process (see FIG. 21). If it is changing when the ball is detected in the probability variation end switch 707, in the variation process (see FIG. 21), after the variation effect is stopped, the probability variation is terminated by the probability variation termination process (S210), and the third “Probability change end” is displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, there is an effect that the player will not be confused even in the above-mentioned "situation in which it seems that the probable change has finished just before the stop of the variation effect".

After S210, it is determined whether or not the variation effect that has just stopped is a big hit (S718). If it is not a big hit (S718: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is a big hit (S718: Yes), it is determined whether or not the certainty variation object entrance counter 203n is 1 or more (S719). If it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S719: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is 1 or more (S719: Yes), the gaming state is in the probability variation, and the ball is in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 of the probability variation object 700. Since it has stayed, the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise to the “angle A2” in order to eject the ball of the probability varying accessory 700 (S720). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. The discharged balls flow down the path 707a below the ball discharging unit 706, and are detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). With this detection as a trigger, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). In addition, when the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is 2 or more, the probability variation rotating body 704 is reciprocated between the state of “angle A1” and the state of “angle A2” before the jackpot game is started, After the jackpot game, there is no sphere in the probability altering object 700.

<Probability period progress processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22, the probability variation period progress processing (S702) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the probability variation period progress processing (S702). The probability variation period progress process (S702) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 21) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotor 704 is rotated to perform the probability variation. This is the process of advancing the period. The probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), when the big hit is not in progress in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) (S701: No). Processing.

In the probability variation period progress processing (FIG. 22, S702), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203l is on (S801). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S801: No), this processing ends. As a result, even if the probability variation period progress processing is executed other than during the probability variation, the processing of S802 to S808 is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is on (S801: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S802).

Next, in the process of S803, it is determined whether the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S803). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S803: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S803: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is “angle A2” or more (S804).

Here, the probability variation rotator 704 is "angle A2 or more" includes the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge part 706 overlap, and further rotates clockwise from the "angle A2". This is the case. In the processing of S804, the MPU 201 determines from the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 the current angle of the probability varying rotor motor 704a to determine whether or not the probability varying rotor 704 is "angle A2" or more. ..

If it is determined that the probability varying rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability varying rotor 704 is not equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (that is, less than the “angle A2”) (S804: No), the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by the “angle AX”. It is rotated (S805).

Here, since the process of S802 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) during the probability variation period, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is One is added every 2 milliseconds during the probability change. In the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more, and this value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, the process (S805) of rotating the probability variation rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle by "angle AX" is not executed for one second.

In the case where a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the arrival of one ball, the inside of the probability variation target object 700 (from the probability variation generation switch 703 to the probability variation end switch 707). If there is a sphere in (between), the probability varying rotator 704 rotates counterclockwise from “angle A2” to “angle A1” for 0.5 seconds after the detection of the incoming ball, and then 0. For 5 seconds, the probability varying rotating body 704 is stopped in the state of “angle A1”. Thereby, the “probability variation longest period” can be constantly doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703.

Further, in the processing of S804, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), this processing ends. The probability variation rotating body 704 being in the “angle A2” state means that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 enters the state of “angle A2”, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to rotate the probability varying rotator 704 further clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S805, this processing is completed. As a result, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering the ball, and if there is no other ball inside the probability variation target object 700 (between the probability variation generation switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the probability variation ends. , The probability varying rotator 704 maintains the state of “angle A2”. After that, when the end of the probability variation period is set, the rotation is set to "angle A1". In the present embodiment, the "angle A2" is rotated counterclockwise at a high speed from the angle "A1", but the invention is not limited to this, and the rotation may be clockwise. .. With this configuration, the probability varying rotating body 704 can be moved to the “angle A1” earlier.

Further, by the process of S805, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AX”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap (from ta1 to ta3 in FIG. 11). ) Is set to 360 seconds. 180,000 corresponding to this 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Since the process of S805 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) during the probability change (S801: No), the “angle AX” is “ The angle A1-A2 of the rotating body 704"/(value of the probability variation period memory 203o)" can be calculated. In this embodiment, the "angle AX" is 0.00166... (=300/180,000) degrees.

When the processing of S805 is executed, then, in order to determine whether the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not it is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806). .. If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: No), this processing ends.

If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: Yes), the probability variation in progress flag is turned off to forcibly terminate the probability variation (S807). An abnormal command is set (S808), and this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 of FIG. 31). As a result, when it is determined that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded, the probability variation is forcibly ended, so that the probability variation period is not unduly extended.

If it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), the processes of S805 to S808 are not executed. As a result, immediately after the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is detected by the probability variation ending switch 707. At that time, if the variation effect is changing. For example, even if the probability variation is not immediately terminated but the probability variation is ended when the variation effect is stopped, the processing of S806 to S808 is executed during the variation of the variation effect to set the probability variation abnormal command. Absent.

<Operation and effect of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates the ball retained in the receiving portion 704b at a constant speed, and the probability variation completion switch 707 is activated. This is a period until the probability change ends in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19) when the ball arrival is detected. That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the conventional gaming machine, the fluctuation effect period tends to be longer as the fluctuation effect period has a higher jackpot reliability (eg, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation effect period is 90 seconds, etc.). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, it is assumed that, during the probability change, a change pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high reliability of the jackpot and a long change effect period is made plural times among the change patterns described with reference to FIG. 9. However, since the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, the probability variation period does not become long due to the variable effect period. In the conventional ST machine, even if the fluctuation pattern that the jackpot is highly reliable and the fluctuation production period is long is made multiple times during the probability change, it does not hit the jackpot, and the game becomes monotonous if the probability change period is simply long. There is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. According to the pachinko machine 10, the "maximum probability variation period" is constant even when a variation production having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is performed, so that the player is not given to the player by simply prolonging the probability variation period. Pleasure can be reduced.

Then, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, there are more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern with high reliability of the jackpot is long and the variation effect period is long, and the variation pattern with the variation effect period with low reliability of the jackpot is not executed, the remaining period until the probability variation ends is: The decrease is larger than when a change pattern having a short change effect period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation effect, the number of chances for the big hit lottery will be reduced. As a result, the player's desire for a big hit in the variation effect is increased. That is, the enthusiasm for the change effect is particularly enhanced.

Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the big hit lottery differs depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that there is an effect that a new game property can be provided to the player. In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

<Function and effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that the probability varying rotor 704a stops rotating due to a failure of the probability varying rotor motor 704a or an illegal disconnection of a line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to stop, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a, Even if a fraudulent act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined in S806 that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation flag is turned off (S807). Since the probability change is forcibly ended, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S709). This variation start processing (S709) is executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c, While carrying out a lottery (big hit lottery) of “big hit” or “out”, an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the variation start process, first, a jackpot lottery process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding sphere execution area 203c (S901). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state (that is, the normal state, the time saving period, and the probability variation flag 203l being off), it is associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. If "7,307,582" is a big hit random number value, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (that is, the probability variation is in progress, the probability variation flag 203l is on), "high" in the jackpot random number table 202a. "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618 associated with the stochastic state" , 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" is a big hit random number value. In the process of S901, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storing area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it means that the jackpot is a jackpot. To determine.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the process of S901 (S901: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation flag is on (S902), and the probability variation flag is determined to be on ( (S902: Yes), according to the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, the number of winnings to the specific winning openings 65a and 650a per one round of the big hit game is determined (S903). That is, in one round of the jackpot game, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened until the balls win the number of winnings per one round of the jackpot game determined in S903. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o, and when the probability variation period measurement counter 203p at the time of jackpot determination is a value corresponding to less than 60 seconds, the number of winnings per round. To 10. Similarly, in the case of 60 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds, the number of prizes per round is nine. In the case of 120 seconds or more and less than 180 seconds, the number of prizes per round is eight. In the case of 180 seconds or more and less than 240 seconds, the number of prizes per round is 7. In the case of 240 seconds or more and less than 300 seconds, the number of prizes per round is 6. In the case of 300 seconds or more, the number of winning prizes per round is 5. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a, 650a and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, if the number of prizes per round is 10, the number of prize balls per round is 150 Is determined. As a result, when a big hit occurs during the probability variation, the earlier the probability variation is started (the smaller the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is), the larger the number of prizes and the number of prize balls per round of the jackpot game. And many.

When it is determined that the probability variation flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S902: No), the number of prize balls is determined (S904). In the present embodiment, in one round of the jackpot game, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened until 10 balls are won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a, 650a and 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, if the number of prizes per round is 10, the number of prize balls per round is 150 Is determined.

<Operation and effect of technical idea 9>
In the present embodiment, when the big hit lottery process (S901) is a big hit during the probability change, in the process of S903, the smaller the value of the probability change period measurement counter 203p is, the more the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player is determined. Configured to. That is, the earlier the lapse of the probability change, the greater the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.

For example, in the case of a big hit during a probability change, a new probability change is started after the big hit game, and a player wants a big hit at an early stage after the probability change starts. Is. According to the pachinko machine 10, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the number of prize balls is increased, so that the player is pleased twice. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs at a stage when the elapsed time from the start of the probability change is late, the player is discouraged because the number of prize balls is small. On the other hand, if it is decided that the probability change will start anew after the jackpot, not only will you be discouraged, but you will find new hope. In this way, the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, so that the pachinko machine 10 can provide a new interest in which the probability variation period corresponds to the number of prize balls.

In the present embodiment, the winning number per round is increased/decreased according to the remaining time (elapsed time) of the probability variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number may be constant. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the payout amount of the jackpot game constant and keep the gambling ability constant.

In the process of S903 or S904, after determining the number of prize balls, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c. The display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S905). Here, when the special figure classification flag is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started from now on is to be executed along with the start winning of the second entrance 640. As shown, the jackpot type table for the “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the special figure classification flag is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is to be executed in association with the start winning of the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of S905 is a probability variation jackpot (S906). That is, when the jackpot type is the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is the certainty variation jackpot, and when the jackpot type is the 15R regular jackpot, it is not the certainty variation jackpot. If it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S906: Yes), the probability variation start schedule 203m is turned on (S907), and the process proceeds to S908. When it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S906: No), the process proceeds to S908.

Since the probability change start flag 203m is turned on in the process of S907 and the ball is then thrown into the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in the middle of a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened (see FIG. 16). It becomes easier for the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 that triggers the transition to the state.

When it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the processing of S901 (S901: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S910). In the process of S910, in the case of the variation effect associated with the start winning in the first entrance 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is displayed, and in the variation effect associated with the starting prize in the second entrance 640. In the case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the third mode As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set to the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach. Then, the process proceeds to S908.

In the processing of S908, the variation pattern is determined (S908). This fluctuation pattern is determined by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, the deviation pattern table 202d (the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2). Is based on. In the processing of S908, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is set.

A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S905 or S910 is set (S909), and this process ends. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15). Sent.

<NMI interrupt processing>
Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

<Startup processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if it is not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the processing is also shifted to S1111 in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1111. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1207 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1111). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1112, S1113) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S1112, S1113) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1112, S1113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1112, S1113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1110, interruption is permitted (S1110). In the process of S1110, a production permission command is set, and thereafter, the production by the sub control device is permitted. Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

Although illustration is omitted, the probability variable rotating body 704 is subjected to initialization and processing for returning to the state before power-off in this startup processing. When the power is cut off during the probability variation period, the rotation amount of the probability variation rotating body 704 is set based on the value of the remaining probability variation period. If the power-off occurs when the probability variation period is set, and then the RAM erase switch is turned on and the power is turned on, the remaining probability variation period is set to 0, and the probability variation rotating body 704. Is set to "angle A1".

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the probability varying rotor 704 is configured to be backed up to the state when the power is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated. Alternatively, the remaining probability variation period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After that, the probability variation rotating body 704 may be rotated to the “angle A2” based on the probability variation period becoming 0.

Further, when the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is 2 or more, the probability variation period corresponding to the value is set, displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability variation period is set. May be. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the probability variation period and the game balls in the probability variation role object 700 are discharged by the initial setting processing or the like, the probability variation period is not set correctly after the power is turned on again. The problem can be suppressed.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As a summary, the counter update processing of S1203 and S1204 is executed with the remaining time of 4 msec cycle.

In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201). If the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1202). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201 and the process of S1201 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1202: No), during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1203, S1204).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1203). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 and 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1204). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

Here, since the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds during the execution of each processing of S1201 to S1204, the processing of S1203 and the processing of S1204 are executed for 4 milliseconds. The remaining time of the cycle is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1201, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1205 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1205), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1206). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1207), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1208), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

<Flowchart of voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

<Startup processing>
First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2117 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during the execution (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 28), the power-off process of S2117 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S2117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the processing is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

On the other hand, if the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2117, the audio lamp control is performed. It is started when the MPU 221 of the device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006), and then the S2008 Move to processing. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2117 of FIG. 28). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2117 is instantaneously performed when the startup process of this time is reached while the power-off flag is turned on. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2011), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process in S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004 when the process in S2008 is performed through the processes in S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

<Main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started, or since the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2112 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2111.

In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2111 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S2112 and the command determination processing of S2113 in a short cycle.

By executing the command determination process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110.

By performing the variation display process of S2112 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variation effect without delay based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received by the command determination process.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2109 described later is set (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed (S2105), and then the reserved quantity display updating process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the number of hold balls of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change to the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preliminary announcement character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S2108). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Then, a ramp edit process is executed (S2109), and then a sound edit/output process is executed (S2110). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound edit/output process, the voice data stored in the RAM 223 is decoded in accordance with the display command (including the reach display command) from the display control device 114 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the decoded audios of all the channels are mixed and the sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set, the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing/output processing, and the alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226.

After the processing of S2110, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2109 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output processing of S2110 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S2111, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, the variable display process, which is a process set to transmit these generated commands to the display control device 114, is executed (S2112).

In the process of S2112, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this variable display processing, a plurality of counters (a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of jackpot, a counter for selecting a stop symbol at the time of disengagement, etc.) mounted on the voice lamp control device 113 are updated, and the value of the counter and the main value are updated. Based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set, and the variation display patterns (short deviation, long deviation, normal reach, super reach, special) Reach) is set. The set stop pattern or variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

Next, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2113). When a command from the main controller 110 is received, if the command is used by the voice lamp controller 113 according to the command, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 233, and used by the display controller 114. If it is a command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The confirmation command, the probability variation end command, the probability variation abnormality command, and the effect permission command from the main control device 110 are transmitted to the display control device 114 as they are.

When the process of S2113 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

<Flowchart of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal is detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. To do.

The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2601). Specifically, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

After the process of S2601, an interrupt permission is set (S2602), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2603), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 14) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the information on the image being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

In this V interruption process, first, a command determination process (S2701) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2702) is executed. In the command determination process (S2701), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. , In the display data table buffer 233a. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table is set in the clock counter 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, the variation pattern command for display, the stop type command for display, and the like are likely to be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The command determination process (S2701) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2701, display setting processing is executed (S2702). In the display setting process (S2702), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S2701), etc., based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the third symbol display device. At 81, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the display content (see FIG. 13) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, A process for generating a display command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content and transmitting the generated display command to the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.

In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are displayed in order from the previously specified display contents. The display command to represent is produced|generated, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the command determination process and the display setting process cause the display control device 114 to transmit a command (for example, a display variation) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. According to (pattern command) or the like, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 should not be changed, but should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

When the program is executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, it is complicated and diversified with the effect image. Since an enormous load is applied to the start-up and execution of the enormous programs, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

In the display setting process (S2702), if the jackpot is in the midst of jackpot, the jackpot effect display setting is performed, the number of rounds of jackpots displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning spheres, a different background for each round, and the like. Display settings are made. If the probability change is in progress, the display setting of the period until the probability change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ends (or the elapsed time from the start of the probability change) is set. Each time the display setting process (S2702) is executed, the clock counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processing that should be performed.

After the display setting process (S2702) is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2703). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting processing (S2702), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes that image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2704). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated from the types of various sprites forming one frame, the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction determined in the task process (S2703). , In the drawing list area 233c. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list.

<Command determination processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a command determination process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command determination process is executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30), analyzes the content of the command stored in the command buffer area, and executes the process according to the command.

When the command interruption process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the display variation pattern command is received (S2801). When the display change pattern command is received (S2801: YES), the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern type indicated by the display change pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233a (S2802). Then, the changing flag 233f is turned on (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. When the changing flag 233f is turned on, the change effect corresponding to the change pattern command for display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2804.

Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received (S2804). When the confirmation command is received (S2804: Yes), the changing flag 233f is turned off (S2805). When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). After S2805, the process proceeds to S2806. The time from the reception of the display variation pattern command (S2801: YES) to the reception of the confirmation command, that is, the variation production period, is as described with reference to FIGS. 8C and 8D. Moreover, it depends on the fluctuation pattern. The variation effect period of this embodiment is 7 seconds for short deviation, 10 seconds for long deviation, 30 seconds for normal reach, 60 seconds for super reach, and 90 seconds for special reach. If the confirmation command has not been received (S2804: No), the process proceeds to S2806.

Next, it is determined whether or not the production permission command set in the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 25) has been received (S2806). When the production permission command is received (S2806: Yes), the production permission flag 233e is turned on (S2807). From the time the effect permission flag 233e is turned on, the effect is displayed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the production permission command has not been received (S2806: No), the process proceeds to S2808.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end command has been received (S2808). When the probability variation end command is received (S2808: Yes), the data for displaying "probability variation end" on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2809). On the other hand, if the probability variation end command has not been received (S2808: No), the process proceeds to S2810.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation abnormal command is received (S2810). When the probability variation abnormality command is received (S2810: Yes), the data for displaying "probability variation abnormality" on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2811). On the other hand, if the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2810: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

Next, it is determined whether or not another command is received (S2812). When another command is received (S2812: Yes), a process (S2813) corresponding to the other command is executed, and this process ends. If the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2812: No), this processing ends.

<Operation and effect of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period in the present embodiment, after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the probability variation rotating body 704 has a ball. With the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates the ball retained in the receiving portion 704b at a constant speed, and the probability variation completion switch 707 is activated. This is a period until the probability change ends in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19) when the ball arrival is detected. That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

In the conventional gaming machine, the fluctuation effect period tends to be longer as the fluctuation effect period has a higher jackpot reliability (eg, normal reach, super reach, special reach). The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation effect period is 90 seconds, etc.). Since the player is interested in jackpots that are advantageous to him/herself, he wants to see a variation production with high reliability of the jackpot even if the variation production period is long.

Here, for example, it is assumed that, during the probability change, a change pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high reliability of the jackpot and a long change effect period is made plural times among the change patterns described with reference to FIG. 9. However, since the probability variation period is a fixed period due to the probability variation role object 700, the probability variation period does not become long due to the variable effect period. In the conventional ST machine, even if the fluctuation pattern that the jackpot is highly reliable and the fluctuation production period is long is made multiple times during the probability change, it does not hit the jackpot, and the game becomes monotonous if the probability change period is simply long. There is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. According to the pachinko machine 10, the "maximum probability variation period" is constant even when a variation production having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is performed, so that the player is not given to the player by simply prolonging the probability variation period. Pleasure can be reduced.

Then, a variation pattern having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is not executed, and a variation pattern having a low jackpot reliability and a short variation effect period (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). In the case where is executed, the decrease in the remaining period until the probability change ends is smaller than that in the case where the change pattern having the long change effect period is executed. Therefore, there are more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern with high reliability of the jackpot is long and the variation effect period is long, and the variation pattern with the variation effect period with low reliability of the jackpot is not executed, the remaining period until the probability variation ends is: The decrease is larger than when a change pattern having a short change effect period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation effect, the number of chances for the big hit lottery will be reduced. As a result, the player's desire for a big hit in the variation effect is increased. That is, the enthusiasm for the variation production is heightened.

Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the big hit lottery differs depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that there is an effect that a new game property can be provided to the player. In addition, the player can predict the end of the probability variation from the motion of the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) to start the probability variation, and then the probability variation rotating body. The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) causes the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 to rotate the ball retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation ends. The switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and the period until the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, during the probability change period, the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering the ball and starts the probability change by the probability change start processing (see FIG. 17). The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) only when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the rotating body 704 is changing in the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Accordingly, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated at a constant speed, the probability variation ending switch 707 detects the ball entering, and the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19) is completed until the probability variation ends. Becomes That is, the period of probability variation elapses only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying after the probability variation starts. That is, the probability variation ends after the variation effect is performed for a predetermined period after the probability variation starts.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in the timing of execution of the probability variation period progressing process (S702 of FIG. 22) performed in the variation process (S109) performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Except for the points, it is the same as the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<The angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability varying>
With reference to FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), the operation of the probability altering compound 700 in the second embodiment will be described. 32A and 32B schematically show the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 of the probability varying object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, and FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change.

First, with reference to FIG. 32A, the relationship between the angle of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability variation will be described. At ta0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At ta0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

ta1 o'clock is a time when one second has elapsed from ta0 o'clock, and is a time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)).

The ta2 o'clock is when 120 seconds have elapsed from the ta1 o'clock, and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 rotates around the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 at a constant speed. I am in the middle of doing it. At this time, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A3” (see FIG. 10B).

At ta3 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from ta2 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotating body 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap without stopping (at ta1 From ta3) to 360 seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) of the fluctuation process of S109 (see FIG. 33). This is because the "angle AX" is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is changing.

Ta4 o'clock is almost the same as ta3 o'clock, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At ta4, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability varying rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After ta4 o'clock, the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by ta5 o'clock 0.5 seconds after ta4 o'clock, The probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”. Since the "angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704" is 300 degrees, at ta4, the MPU 201 causes the probability varying rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 to the probability varying rotor of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". In addition, as long as the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, the “maximum probability variation period”, which is the period from ta0 to ta4, is about 361 seconds.

During the period during the probability change (the period from ta 0:00 to ta 4:00), the lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the relationship between the angle of the probability varying rotor 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability variation will be described. At tb0, the ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At tb0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation.

The time tb1 is the time when one second has elapsed from the time tb0, and is the time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)).

The time tb2 is the time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time tb1. Before tb2, for example, the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball to the game board 13 has a failure, the nail on the game board 13 is clogged with the ball, the game board to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is the case where the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has not been entered due to factors such as the nail on 13 being tightened. Then, at tb2, the values of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b become 0, and thereafter, the variation effect is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation period advancing processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) is performed only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying, by the probability variation rotating body 704. The probability varying rotor motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed. As a result, in the state in which the variation effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 32B, the probability varying rotating body 704 does not rotate and continues to stop at the “angle A3”. That is, the period of probability change does not elapse in the state where the variation effect is not executed.

At tb3 o'clock, about 120 seconds have elapsed from tb2 o'clock. This is the time when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 before tb3 and a new variation effect is started. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation period advancing processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) is performed only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying, by the probability variation rotating body 704. Since the probability varying rotor motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating at a constant speed from tb3 around the probability varying rotor motor 704a. That is, if it is changing, the period of probability change passes.

At tb4 o'clock, 240 seconds have elapsed from tb4 o'clock, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability varying rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. In the present embodiment, the total time (from tb1 o'clock) of the variation time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap. The total of tb2 o'clock and tb3 o'clock to tb4 o'clock) is 360 seconds. During this time, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating at a constant speed about the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704. This is because every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) of the fluctuation process of S109 (see FIG. 33). This is because the "angle AX" is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is changing.

The time tb5 is substantially the same as the time tb4, and when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharging portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Is. At tb5, the probability variation ends by the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). After tb5 o'clock, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of "angle A1", and by tb6 at which 0.5 seconds has elapsed from tb5 o'clock, the probability varying rotator 704 becomes "angle". The state becomes “A1”. During the period during the probability change (the period from tb0 to tb5), the lottery is performed in response to the fact that the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 have been entered. In this lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a of "high probability state" is used.

<Variation processing>
With reference to FIG. 33, the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 22) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed. The variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation process in the second embodiment (FIG. 33) are different from each other in the first implementation except that the execution timing of the probability variation period progress process (S702 in FIG. 22) is different. It is the same as the form.

In the first embodiment, if it is not a big hit (S701: No in FIG. 22), the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and if the changing time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is updated (S715), and then the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed (S702 of FIG. 33). Thereby, since the probability variation is started, the probability variation period can be configured to elapse only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is varying. That is, the probability variation ends after the variation effect is performed for a predetermined period after the probability variation starts.

<Function and effect of technical idea 4>
For example, the ball launching unit 112a that launches a ball to the game board 13 has a failure, the nail on the game board 13 is clogged with a ball, and the nail on the game board 13 to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is Due to factors such as being tightened, it may be difficult or difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In these cases, when the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 approaches the probability variation ending switch 707 (ball discharging portion 706), chances of lottery during probability variation decrease, so the game Cannot secure the profit of the person. According to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, unless the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability-changing rotating body 704 ends with a probability change. Since the switch 707 (ball discharging unit 706) is not approached and the chances of the lottery during the probability change are not reduced, the player's profit can be protected. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 when the special symbol is changing, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the time when the special symbol is variably displayed is added (totaled), The probability variable rotating body 704 may be configured to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the total time. With this configuration, it is possible to rotate a fixed amount of rotation with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) to start the probability variation, and then the probability variation rotating body. The probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) causes the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 to rotate the ball retained at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 at a constant speed, and the probability variation ends. The switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and the period until the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation started).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, a score (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the period of the probability change is given. After starting the probability variation, the sphere stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, immediately before the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is stopped (for example, 2 seconds), the probability variation period progress processing ( By referring to FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 is swung at an angle (the number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the probability variation period is changed according to the variation pattern. Add points to progress (hereinafter, "probability period progress points"). The “probability variation period progress score” is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach. When the total value of the “probability variation period progress points” becomes equal to or greater than the points (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the probability variation period, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A2”. 704 is operated. Here, the rotation angle of the probability varying rotor 704 corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point” is ““the angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704”÷(the number of points representing the probability variation period (50 points))”. Since it can be calculated, the rotation angle of the probability varying rotator 704 corresponding to one point of “probability variation period progress score” is 6 degrees. The probability variation rotator 704 is rotated by a different angle for each variation pattern each time the variation effect is produced. As a result, when the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the probability variation terminating switch 707 detects the ball entry. Then, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19). That is, after the probability variation is started, the probability variation period elapses for each variation pattern for a period different for each variation pattern.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is part of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, part of the ROM 202, and part of the variation process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201. The process is the same as that of the first embodiment, except that part of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 38) and part of the probability variation period progress process (FIG. 39) are different. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Probability variation period deduction memory 203r>
Various types of data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 34B shows various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

First, FIG. 34A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In addition to the data of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, it has a probability variation period deduction memory 203r.

The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is a memory for storing “probability variation period progress points”. The “probability variation period progress score” is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach.

In the probability variation period deduction memory 203r, 0 is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the variation effect is started by the MPU 201, the “probability variation period progress score” is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r in the variation start process (see FIG. 38). The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is for adding a value to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) immediately before the variation time of the variation effect started before (for example, 2 seconds ago). , To rotate the probability varying rotator 704. The probability variation period deduction memory 203r can rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 immediately before the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed. The rotation angle of the probability varying rotator 704 corresponding to one point of the value of the probability varying period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period progress point”) is 6 degrees.

Next, FIG. 34B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. In place of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a jackpot variation pattern table 202e is provided, and instead of the detachment variation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a detachment variation pattern. It has a table 202f.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202e is a table in which a “probable variation period progress score” is added to each variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c in the first embodiment.

The deviation pattern table for deviation 202f is a table in which “probability variation period progress score” is added to each fluctuation pattern of the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d in the first embodiment.

FIG. 35A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. The “probable variation period progress score” is added to the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. The "probability variation period progress points" are 2 points for each normal reach type, 3 points for each super reach type, and 5 points for each special reach type.

FIG. 35B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. The “probability variation period progress score” is added to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8D) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, there are two out-of-range variation pattern tables in the normal state and the probability variation, and a variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 8E). Although there are two, there is one variation pattern table for disconnection in the third embodiment. The “probability variation period progress score” is 1 for short deviation, 1 for long deviation, 2 for normal reach, 3 for super reach, and 5 for special reach.

<Elapsed time from the start of the probability change and the total value of the “progress of the probability change period”>
Next, the operation of the probability altering compound 700 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the elapsed time from the start of the probability variation and the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”.

At t0, a ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At t0, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1”, and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, points (50 points in this embodiment) representing the period of the probability change are given. From t0, super reach (60 seconds, 3 points) is started to be executed as the first fluctuating effect during probability change.

The time t1 is 58 seconds after the time t0, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t2. This is because the variation process (see FIG. 37) executes the probability variation period progressing process (see FIG. 39) 2 seconds before the variation time of the variation effect, and the probability variation rotating body 704 takes 2 seconds in the probability variation period progressing process. This is because it is rotated (see S3205 in FIG. 39). Note that, as described above, the angle corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress score” is 6 degrees.

t2 o'clock is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from t1 o'clock, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of the total number of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t2, the super reach variation effect is stopped, and short deviation (7 seconds, 1 point) is started as the next variation effect.

At t3 o'clock, 5 seconds elapses from t2 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the elapse of the fluctuation time, the probable variation rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probable variation rotor motor 704a. The probability varying rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability varying period progress point”, and finishes rotating by t4.

At t4 o'clock, 2 seconds have elapsed from t3 o'clock, and the probability varying rotor 704 is rotating from "angle A1" to an angle (24 degrees) corresponding to four points of the total value of "probability varying period progress points". It is in a state. At t4, the short deviation effect is stopped, and the long deviation (10 seconds, 1 point) is started as the next fluctuation effect.

At t5 o'clock, 8 seconds elapse from t4 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t6.

At t6, 2 seconds have elapsed from t5, and the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of the total number of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t6, the out-of-long variation effect is stopped, and the normal reach (30 seconds, 2 points) is started to be executed as the next variation effect.

At t7, 28 seconds has elapsed from t6, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise about the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (12 degrees) corresponding to two points of “probability variation period progress points”, and completes rotation by t8.

At t8 o'clock, 2 seconds have elapsed from t7 o'clock, and the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotating from “angle A1” to an angle (42 degrees) corresponding to 7 points of the total value of “probability varying period progress points”. It is in a state. At t8, the normal reach variation effect is stopped, and as the next variation effect, the special reach (90 seconds, 5 points) is started to be executed.

At t9 o'clock, 88 seconds elapse from t8 o'clock, and 2 seconds before the change time elapses, the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a. The probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of the “probability variation period progress point”, and completes rotation by t10.

t10 o'clock is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from t9 o'clock, and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotating from "angle A1" to an angle (72 degrees) corresponding to 12 points of the total value of "probability variation period progress points". It is in a state. At t10, the jackpot is determined by the change effect of the special reach, and then the jackpot game is started.

In FIG. 36, the case of a big hit during the probability change is explained, but when the big hit does not occur during the probability change, the total value of the “probability change period progress points” is a score representing the period of the probability change given at the start of the probability change (this implementation. Probability change continues until it becomes 50 points or more in the form).

<Variation processing>
The variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) of rotating the probability variation rotating body 704 to advance the probability variation period is also executed. The variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation process in the third embodiment (FIG. 37) are the probabilistic variation period progress process (see FIG. 22 for the first embodiment, see FIG. 39 for the third embodiment). The first embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the execution timing of the above is different.

In the first embodiment, if it is not a big hit (S701 in FIG. 22: No), the probability variation period progress processing (S702 in FIG. 22) is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and if the changing time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is updated (S715). After that, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is 2 seconds before the change time elapses (S3001), and if it is before 2 seconds before the change time elapses (S3001: No), the present process To finish. On the other hand, if it is 2 seconds before the variation time elapses (S3001: Yes), the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 39) is executed (S3002), and this processing ends. As a result, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed. Note that the probability variation period progress processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment.

In contrast to the fluctuation start process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 23), the fluctuation start process of the third embodiment (FIG. 38) is added with the process of S3101 just before the end of the fluctuation start process. different. In the process of S3101, a point “probability variation period progress point” based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table (the jackpot variation pattern table 202e or the deviation variation pattern table 202f) is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r ( S3101). That is, with respect to the variation pattern, the values of the points set in the variable period deduction memory 203r are 1 point for short deviation, 1 point for long deviation, 2 points for various normal reach types, 3 points for various super reach types, and 3 types for special reach types. 5 points. Thereby, in the probability variation period advancing process (see FIG. 39) executed immediately before the variation time of the variation effect, the probability variation period can be advanced according to the value set in the variable period deduction memory 203r.

<Probability period progress processing>
Next, the probability variation period progress processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the probability variation period progress processing (S3002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The probability variation period progressing process (S3002) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 37) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated to perform the probability variation. This is the process of advancing the period.

In the probability variation period progress processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on (S3201). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S3201: No), this processing ends. As a result, even if the probability variation period progress processing is executed other than during the probability variation, the processing of S3202 to S3208 is not executed. If it is determined that the probability variation in progress flag 203l is ON (S3201: Yes), the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether the value is equal to or more than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202), and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is determined. If it is not equal to or greater than the value of 203o (that is, less than) (S3202: No), the value corresponding to the probability variation period deduction memory 203r is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S3203). As a result, the processes of S3203 to S3206 can be executed only when the probability variation period should be advanced (S3202: No).

Here, the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is a value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates from the state of the probability variation rotating body 704 to the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2”. Is set. In the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), the probability variation period memory 203o corresponds to 180 seconds (=360 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to 360 seconds in the probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17). 17 is set (see S304 in Fig. 17). In the third embodiment, during the period in which the probability varying rotor 704 rotates from the state of "angle A1" to the state of "angle A2". The corresponding value, that is, the number of points representing the probability variation period is 50. Therefore, in the process of S3203, unlike the first embodiment, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p has “value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r÷ The value calculated by “the number of points representing the probability variation period (50 points)×the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (180000)” is added. For example, when the variation pattern is short deviation, the variation start in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r is changed. In the process, one point is set (see S3101 in Fig. 38.) Therefore, in the process of S3203, "the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p x 3600" is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p.

After the process of S3203, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not the value of the probability variation period memory 203o is greater than or equal to (S3204). If the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (that is, less than). (S3204: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY” corresponding to the value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period number of points”) (S3205). Here, the “angle AY” can be calculated by “value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r/(points representing the probability variation period (50 points))×(angle A1-A2 (300 degrees) of the probability variation rotating body 704)”. .. For example, when the variation pattern is out of bounds, one point is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r in the variation start process (see S3101 in FIG. 38). Therefore, in the processing of S3205, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY (value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r×6 degrees)”. In order to complete the rotation of the “angle AY” by 2 seconds after the fluctuation effect is stopped, the MPU 201 causes the probability variable rotor motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variable rotor 704 to the probability variable rotor of the probability variable rotor 704. A predetermined command for rotating the motor 704a at “angle “AY”/2 degrees per second in a clockwise direction” is output. Thus, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation effect is stopped according to the variation pattern of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines that the value is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3204: Yes), the probability variation rotating body 704 is set to " The process is ended by rotating clockwise until the angle A2" (S3206). When the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, the ball in the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged from the ball discharging portion 706. The discharged balls flow down the path 707a below the ball discharging unit 706, and are detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). With this detection as a trigger, the probability variation ends in the probability variation ending process (see FIG. 19).

In the process of S3202, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202: Yes), the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207), and the probability variation abnormality command is set ( (S3208), this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Function and effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that the probability varying rotor 704a stops rotating due to a failure of the probability varying rotor motor 704a or an illegal disconnection of a line connecting the probability varying rotor motor 704a and the MPU 201. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotating body 704 continues to stop, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 does not reach the ball discharging portion 706. That is, the ball stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 overlap with each other, in order to prevent illegally discharging the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b to the route 707a, Even if a fraudulent act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharging portion 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 is discharged from the ball. It does not reach the part 706. With these, the probability change can be illegally extended.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined in S3202 that the elapsed period of the probability variation period has exceeded from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o, the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207). Since the probability change is forcibly ended, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Function and effect of technical idea 5>
According to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering and the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) starts the probability variation. At the start of the probability change, a score (50 points in the present embodiment) representing the period of the probability change is given. After starting the probability variation, the sphere stopped in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704, just before the stop of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) (for example, 2 seconds), the probability variation period progress processing ( By referring to FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotating body 704 is swung at an angle (the number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect. As a result, the player who knows the rotation amount of the probability varying rotating body 704 corresponding to the variation effect, when the variation effect is visually recognized, how accurately the sphere retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotating body 704 changes. It is possible to determine whether the end switch 707 (ball discharging unit 706) is approaching. That is, there is an effect that the end of the probability change can be predicted from the change effect.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to the third embodiment, it is inspected whether or not the probability altering object 700 is broken during the jackpot game (probability can be started. A configuration for determining whether or not) has been added.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a part of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, a switch reading process (FIGS. 41 and 42) executed by the MPU 201, and a variation process (FIG. 45). ) Is the same as the first embodiment except that a part of the processing of () and a part of the change start processing (FIG. 46) are different. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Probability change determination flag 203s>
Various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. In addition to the data in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is included.

The probability variation determination flag 203s is a flag that indicates whether to start a probability variation determination process that inspects whether the probability variation object 700 is out of order. This indicates that the probability variation determination process is started when the probability variation determination flag 203s is ON, and the probability variation determination process is not started when the probability variation determination flag 203s is OFF. The probability variation determination flag 203s is used to determine whether to start the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) by the MPU 201.

The probability variation determination flag 203s is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot described above or 4R probability variation jackpot) is determined (see FIG. 46), the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on, and the probability variation generation switch 703 can enter the ball during the jackpot game. In the probability variation determination start process (see FIG. 43), when the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) is started, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off.

<Switch reading process>
Next, the switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the switch reading process (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to mainly enter the through switch 701, the probability variation generation switch 703, and the probability variation end switch 707 that form the probability variation object 700. This is processing for detecting and executing processing according to the detection.

In the switch reading process (FIG. 41) of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined Yes in the process of S4001 (“A” in FIG. 41), the process of shifting to the process of S211 (“B” in FIG. 41), Is different from the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) of the first embodiment.

When the switch reading process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S4001). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37A, 37B at the time of the big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is not a big hit (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S201. The processing of S201 to S211 is the same as the switch reading processing (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to S4002 (see “A” in FIG. 42). As a result, it is possible to execute a process for allowing the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 during the big hit game. In the processing of S4002, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002). Here, a ball entering the through switch 701 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag 203s is on to determine whether or not the electric tulip 702 should be opened. Yes (S4003). When it is determined that the probability variation determination flag 203s is ON (S4003: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (electrical accessory 702a is opened) (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. This allows the ball to enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag 203s is not on (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in the open state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball does not enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. .. If the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot described above) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 46) of the MPU 201, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by inserting the ball into the through switch 701 during the big hit game after the probability variation big hit is determined, and the ball enters the probability variation generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. Will be able to When it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S4002: No), the process proceeds to S4005.

Next, in the processing of S4005, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005). Here, a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S4006), and the probability change determination start process (S4007) is performed. After executing, the process proceeds to S4008. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance of the electric tulip 702. (For example, up to 4) Note that the probability changeable determination start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

Next, in the processing of S4008, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008). Here, the ball entering the probability change end switch 707 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has entered the probability variation end switch 707 (S4008: Yes), the probability variation determination end process (S4009) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. Note that the probability variation determination end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008: No), the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. In the processing of S211, other processing is executed (S211), the switch reading processing is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

<Probability change start processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43, the probability variation determination start processing (S4007) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination start processing (S4007). The probability variation determination start process (S4007) is performed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 41 and FIG. 42) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703. Is a process of starting a process of inspecting (determining whether or not probability variation can be started) whether or not the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game.

When the probability variation determination start processing is executed, first, the probability variation target object that is a counter that stores the number of balls entering the probability variation role object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). One is added to the entry counter 203n (S4101). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation determination flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S4102: No), the probability variation determination start processing ends and the process returns to the switch reading processing (see FIG. 42).

If the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103). Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4104), and a value corresponding to the probability variation determination scheduled period is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S4105). In the present embodiment, 15000 (=30 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period 30 seconds of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. The scheduled period of 30 seconds for the probability variation determination is a period during which the probability variation rotor 704 rotates from the state of the angle “A1” to the state of the angle “A2”.

Here, the processing of S4103 to S4105 is processing for starting the probability change possibility determination processing. If the probability variation determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability variation determination flag 203s is off (S4103) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703. This is to execute the process of starting the probability changeable determination process only when the first ball is entered. That is, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the first ball, the probability variation determination flag 203s is on, so that all the processes of S4101 to S4105 are executed. Next, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of the second ball, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103), so the processes of S4101 and S4102 are executed, and the processes of S4103 to S4105 are performed. Is not executed. As a result, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change generation switch 703, the probability change possibility determination process can be started.

<Probability change end process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the probability variation determination end processing (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination end processing (S4009). The probability variation determination end process (S4009) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIGS. 41 and 42) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation end switch 707 is entered. Is a process of terminating the process of inspecting (determining whether or not probability variation can be started) whether or not the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game.

When the probability variation determination end processing is executed, first, the probability variation component entrance counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S4201), and the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on to schedule the probability variation start (S4202). Thus, thereafter, when the ball is thrown into the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not in a big hit, the electric tulip 702 is opened (see FIG. 41 ), so that the probability change occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state is set. It becomes easier to enter the ball. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation material entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S4203). When the probability variation object entry counter 203n is determined to be 0 (S4203: Yes), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise to "angle A1" (S4204), and the probability variation determination end process is ended. , Return to the switch reading process. When the process of S4204 is executed, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability varying rotor 704” is 300 degrees, in the process of S4204, the probability varying rotor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704a (motor driver) of the probability varying rotor 704 is subjected to the probability variation of the probability varying rotor 704. The MPU 201 controls the definite variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704a at "a speed of 600 degrees counterclockwise per second". As a result, the probability variable rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” 0.5 seconds after the process of S4204. Therefore, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the state of “angle A1” at the end of the jackpot game.

In the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4203: No), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S4205). Next, 0 is set to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4206), a value corresponding to the probability variation determination scheduled period is set to the probability variation period memory 203o (S4207), the probability variation determination end process is ended, and the switch reading process is performed. Return to. In the present embodiment, 15000 (=30 seconds/(timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period 30 seconds of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o.

Here, the processing of S4205 to S4207 is not processing for ending the probability variation determination processing, but processing for restarting the probability variation determination processing again according to the number of balls that entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703. .. The processes of S4205 to S4207 are executed when the probability variation generation switch 703 has a plurality of balls. When there are a plurality of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703, since the balls are retained in the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703, the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” ( S4205), the ball that has been stopped on the path 703a below the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704. One second after the execution of S4205 to S4207, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to start rotating clockwise by the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 45). The process of S4205 is the same as the process of S4204.

<Variation processing>
The variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. And the probability variation possibility determination process (see FIG. 47) that rotates the probability variation rotating body 704 and inspects whether the probability variation role object 700 is out of order during the big hit game (determines whether it is possible to start the probability variation). To be executed. The variation process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment and the variation process (see FIG. 33) in the fourth embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Is.

When the variation process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S701). When the big hit is not in progress (S701: No), the processes after S702 are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S701: Yes), the probability variation determination process (S4301) is executed, and this process ends. The probability changeable determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. As a result, only during the jackpot game, the probability variation possibility determination process for inspecting whether the probability variation role object 700 is out of order can be executed.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment.

Instead of the process of turning on the probability variation start schedule flag 203m of the variation start process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment (see S907 of FIG. 23), the variation start process of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 46) is performed in S4401. The difference is that processing is added. The process of S4401 is executed in the jackpot lottery process of S901, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S901: Yes), and when it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot in the process of S906 (S906: Yes). In the process of S4401, the probability variation determination flag 203s is turned on (S4401). As a result, when the ball is inserted into the through switch 701 during the big hit game, the electric tulip 702 is opened. Therefore, based on the ball entry into the probability variation generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702, it is inspected whether the probability variation accessory 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determination whether probability variation can be started). can do.

<Probability change determination process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47, the probability variation determination process (S4301) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the probability changeable determination process (S4301). The probability variation determination process (S4301) is a process performed in the variation process (see FIG. 45) performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and rotates the probability variation rotating body 704, This is a process of inspecting whether the probability variation object 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determining whether probability variation can be started).

The probability variation determination process (S4301) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), when the jackpot is being hit in the variation process (see FIG. 45) (S701: Yes). It is a process that is performed.

When the probability variation possibility determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation accessory entry ball counter 203n is 0 (S4501). If the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is 0 (S4501: Yes), this processing ends. Thereby, even if the probability variation possibility determination process is executed when the sphere does not exist inside the probability variation combination object 700 (between the probability variation generation switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the processes of S4502 to S4507 are not executed. When it is determined that the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4501: No), 1 is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4502).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503). When it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S4503: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is “angle A2” or more (S4504).

Here, the probability variation rotator 704 is "angle A2 or more" includes the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge part 706 overlap, and further rotates clockwise from the "angle A2". This is the case. In the process of S4504, the MPU 201 obtains the current angle of the probability varying rotor motor 704a from (the motor driver of) the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 to determine whether the probability varying rotor 704 is equal to or greater than "angle A2". ..

When it is determined that the probability varying rotator 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is not equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (that is, less than the “angle A2”) (S4504: No), the probability varying rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by the “angle AZ”. It is rotated (S4505).

Here, since the processing of S4501 to S4505 is processing that is executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) during the jackpot game, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 2 One is added every millisecond. In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period counter 203p is 500 or more, and the value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, for one second after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, the process (S4505) of rotating the probability variation rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle by “angle AZ” is not executed. During the jackpot game, the process in which the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 is two processes, a probability variation determination start process (see FIG. 43) and a probability variation determination end process (see FIG. 44). After the probability variation determination start processing (see FIG. 43) is executed, that is, for one second after the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the ball entering, the probability variation rotating body 704 stops in the state of “angle A1”. ing. In addition, after the probability variation determination end process (see FIG. 44), that is, when a plurality of balls enter the probability variation generation switch 703, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of one ball, When a sphere is present inside the probability-change object 700 (between the probability-change occurrence switch 703 and the probability-change end switch 707), the probability-change rotor 704 is rotated counterclockwise for 0.5 seconds after the detection of the incoming ball. The rotation changes from "angle A2" to "angle A1", and the probability variation rotating body 704 is stopped in the state of "angle A1" for 0.5 seconds thereafter. As a result, the probability variation possibility determination process can be executed again according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703.

Further, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the probability varying rotating body 704 is equal to or more than the “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this processing is ended. The probability variation rotating body 704 being in the “angle A2” state means that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 enters the state of “angle A2”, the sphere of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to rotate the probability varying rotator 704 further clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S4505, this processing is completed. As a result, the probability variation rotating body 704 maintains the state of “angle A2” until the probability variation end switch 707 detects the ball entering.

Further, by the processing of S4505, the probability varying rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AZ”. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state in which the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotor 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped (scheduled period of probability variation determination) is 30 seconds. 15000 corresponding to this 30 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Since the process of S4505 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the "angle AZ" is "the angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotating body 704". /(Value of probability variation period memory 203o)". In this embodiment, the “angle AZ” is 0.02 (=300/15000) degrees.

When the processing of S4505 is executed, next, in order to determine whether the scheduled period of the probability variation determination is exceeded, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not it is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506). ). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: No), this processing ends.

If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or more than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: Yes), the probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507), and this processing ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Function and effect of technical idea 7>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the big hit (S4001: Yes in FIG. 41 ), even if the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the probability variation does not start (the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17 ). The probability variation determination start processing (see FIG. 43) is executed without executing the above). During the jackpot game, enter the probability variation generation switch 703 and the ball retained in the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is transferred to the probability variation end switch 707 (ball discharging portion 706) by the probability variation determination processing (see FIG. 47). Lead. If the main controller 110 determines that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period of the probability variation determination from the probability variation period memory 203o and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, the probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507 in FIG. 47). .. The display control device 114 that has received the probability variation abnormality command displays "probability variation abnormality" on the third symbol display device 81 to notify it. As a result, during the jackpot game, if the operation of the probability variation auditors 700 (particularly, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a or the probability variation ending switch 707) is normal, the notification of "probability variation abnormality" is not issued. Therefore, when the information displayed as “probability variation abnormality” is notified, the player or the store clerk at the game hall who visually recognizes the notification displayed as “probability variation abnormality” causes the probability variation target object 700 (in particular, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a or There is an effect that it can be known that the probability variation end switch 707) is out of order.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. ..

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a small hit other than the hit is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and if the small hit is won during the probability change, the variation pattern at the time of the miss is selected by lottery. For this reason, a configuration is added for executing the process of switching the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, some configurations of the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), the start winning process (FIG. 20, S110), and the variation start process (FIG. 23, S709) executed by the MPU 201 are the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50) and the starting prize process (FIG. 51, S110) and fluctuation start processing (FIG. 52, S709). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment, some of the configurations of the RAM 203 and the R0M202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from those of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48A, in the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment, a migration number counter 203t is added to the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 7A). Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When a small hit is won in the probability variation state, the shift number counter 203t selects a particular variation pattern table (for deviation (probability variation) variation patterns A to E) from the variation pattern table of the deviation. This is a storage area in which the number of transitions set in the fluctuation pattern table is set. When a specific variation pattern table is selected, the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed up to the number of times of transition set in the variation pattern, and the normal variation pattern table (displacement (probability variation) variation pattern table) is displayed. Is set.

The transfer number counter 203t is set with the transfer number set in the set transfer destination table in the process of S945 of the small hit process (S929 of FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, by the process of S932 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 52, S709), the special symbol is updated by subtracting one each time the fluctuation starts (whether or not the win/fail judgment is lost).

In this way, when the small win is won, the variation pattern table in the case of a deviation is switched and set by the lottery, but when the number of transitions of the set variation pattern table elapses, it is switched to the normal variation pattern table. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting how many times the number of transitions is set in the table. Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period (the period until the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch) is the probability variation game state, so the variation pattern table selected when the small hit is won is extremely varied. A variation pattern with a short time is configured to be easily selected, and more lottery games can be played during a certain variation. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the variation pattern table in which a larger number of transitions is set is selected.

When the content of the RAM 203 is initialized, the transition number counter 203t is initialized to 0 which is an initial value. On the other hand, normally, the value of the transition number counter 203t is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the value is returned to the value when the power is turned off and set.

As shown in FIG. 48B, the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B) in the deviation pattern table for deviation 202g, the switching selection table 202h, and the small selection table 202h. Each winning random number table 202i is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern table 202g differs from the deviation variation table 202d in the first embodiment in that deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E (see FIG. 49A) are added. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are variation pattern tables selected by lottery when the small hit is won when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability variation state). In addition, if the game state is probable that the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is further selected and if the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are selected, if a small hit is won, it is selected by lottery. It is a fluctuation pattern table that is.

Further, the number of shifts is set in each of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E as shown in FIG. When the variation of the special symbol is executed up to the number of times set to the number of transitions when each variation pattern table is selected, the number of transitions is a normal variation pattern table, which is a deviation (probability variation) for deviation. The pattern table (FIG. 9E) is forcibly moved and set.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if the small hit is won, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift to the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table E. Is configured to.

Here, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is set to have the number of transitions of 500, which is larger than the number of transitions of other variation pattern tables. Further, the outlying (probable variation) variation pattern table E is a case where a small win is won (winning probability 28/900) when any of the outlying (probably variation) variation pattern tables A to D is set. Only when the value of the switching counter CK1 acquired in this case is 399 (selection probability 1/400), the variation pattern table is extremely hard to be selected.

However, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is set to 1/30, and the period of the high-probability state is set to at least 360 seconds, so that the longest variation time of the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E is set. Even if all are selected, it is possible to change the special symbol 72 times, and in fact, since it is possible to change more than that, it is possible to increase the possibility that the jackpot is drawn during the period of the high probability state. ..

In this way, by shifting to the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables A to D, the player can easily select an extremely short fluctuation pattern of deviation, and more lottery can be executed in a short time. You can raise expectations. Further, when the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if a small hit is won, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. Can play the game with the expectation of shifting to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the high probability state more, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small win is won when the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, only a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E. With this configuration, when a variation pattern table with a large number of transitions has been selected, a variation pattern table with a small number of transitions is selected, and a problem that the number of transitions is substantially reduced can be prevented. did. Further, when the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is selected, even if the small hit is won, the change selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of shifts is changed to another fluctuation pattern table before the number of shifts reaches 0, even though the big hit is not made.

In the present embodiment, when any of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E is set, when the jackpot is hit or the high-probability game state ends, the number of transitions remains. Also, it is configured so that a variation pattern table corresponding to the next gaming state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E are hit big, after the jackpot game, if it is in a high probability state, the outlier (probability change) variation pattern table (FIG. 9). (E)), if it is a low probability game state, it is configured to set the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, but not limited to this, when a higher probability game state is maintained after the jackpot game For example, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to E that have been set may be set as they are, and the game may be executed with the remaining number of transitions. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player.

As described above, the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), if a small hit is won when the high-probability gaming state is set, the set variation pattern table is changed to another variation pattern table. It is a selection table for determining whether to transfer. As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the small hit is won, the selected variation pattern table is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (see FIG. 9(e)), and a deviation variation pattern table. The value of the switching counter CK1 is set for the change pattern table of the transfer destination separately from the case where A to D are selected.

When the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table (FIG. 9E) is set and the small hit is won, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are displayed as shown in FIG. 49B. The hits of the switching counter CK1 are assigned and set. When a value other than the set value of the switching counter CK1 is acquired, the transition of the fluctuation pattern table is not performed. The number of transitions (10 to 40 times) is set in each of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D, and when any variation pattern table is selected, it is set in the selected variation pattern table. The number of transitions is set in the transition counter 203t.

As shown in FIG. 49B, if any of the outlier (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D is set and the small hit is won, if the acquired switching counter CK1 is 399. The determination value of the switching counter CK1 is set so that the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is set.

Thus, according to the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49(b)), during the high-probability game state, the normal deviation (probability change) variation pattern table in which the number of transitions is not set (FIG. 9(e)) ) Is set, by winning the small hit, a transition lottery to the outlying (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D, which is advantageous to the player, is executed, so that the player has a high probability game. It is possible to play a game while expecting to win a small hit in the state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a determination result that expects the player to win in addition to the jackpot, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

If any of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D is set, if the small hit is won, the deviation (probability variation) is more advantageous to the player than the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D. ) Since the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the fluctuation pattern table E is executed based on the switching selection table 202h, the player can set a small value even when the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables A to D are set. You can play games with the expectation of winning the prize.

The small hit random number table 202i (see FIG. 49(c)) is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first small random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit is set for each gaming state. In the small hit random number table 202i, the small hit determination value is not set in the low probability state. As a result, in the low probability state, the small win is not won. Further, in the high probability state, the determination value of "0 to 27" is set as the winning determination value of the small hit. Since this determination value is set to a value other than the determination value that is determined to be the big hit, the determination value for the small hit is set to the determination value that is determined to be out. This makes it possible to set a small hit without reducing the big hit probability in the high probability state.

When the small hit is won, a symbol (341 in the present embodiment) indicating the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the LED is also turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in a display mode indicating the small hit. It After that, the small hit game is executed in which the specific winning opening 65a is executed for two rounds in the opening time of 3 seconds. As for the gaming state after the small hit game, the gaming state at the time of small hit winning is maintained (when the high probability state ends after the small hit winning, the low probability state is set).

Next, the control processing in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control processing in the fifth embodiment, the timer interrupt control processing, the fluctuation start processing, and the start winning processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from those in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50) according to the fifth embodiment is updated by adding 1 to the value of the switching counter CK1 in the process of S120 with respect to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) according to the first embodiment. Processing has been added. The switching counter CK1 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 299, and is a counter for determining whether to shift the fluctuation pattern table when a small hit is won in the high probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a fluctuation start process (S709), which is one process in the fluctuation process (FIG. 21, S109) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this variation start processing (S709).

In the variation start process (FIG. 51, S709), first, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result is a win (big hit) (S921). When it is determined that the hit/no hit determination result is a hit (S921: Yes), the setting necessary for the big hit game is set (S922). Here, the setting required for the jackpot game is set to the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the selected jackpot type, the maximum number of prizes per round to the specific winning opening 65a, the maximum time of one round, and the like. ..

The display mode at the time of a big hit (the display mode of the first symbol display device 37) is set (S923). It is determined whether or not the selected jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (S924). When it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S924: Yes), the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S924: No), the process of S926 is executed.

In the process of S926, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 based on the set fluctuation pattern table (S926). A stop type command is set (S927), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S921, when it is determined that the hit/miss determination result is out (S921: No), it is determined whether or not the hit/fail determination result is a small hit (S928). When it is determined that it is a small hit (S928: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S929).

Here, the small hitting process (S929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this small hitting process (S929).

It is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on, that is, whether the probability variation is in progress (during high probability state) (S941). If it is determined that the during-probability change flag 203l is on (S941: Yes), the variation pattern table is selected from the switching selection table 202h (FIG. 49(c)) based on the acquired value of the switching counter CK1. A lottery is executed (S942). Here, based on the currently set fluctuation pattern table and the value of the switching counter CK1, the selection lottery is performed for the fluctuation pattern table to which the switching selection table 202h is transferred. By this lottery, when the value of the switching counter CK1 for which the transfer destination fluctuation pattern table is not set is acquired, the transfer of the fluctuation pattern table is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the change pattern table of the transfer destination is determined by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small hit is won, the change pattern table is changed to a predetermined change pattern table. You may.

In the process of S943, it is determined whether or not the shift of the fluctuation pattern table is determined in the process of S942. When it is determined that the change of the fluctuation pattern table has been decided (S943: Yes), the change pattern table of the decided change destination is set (S944). The transfer count set in the set fluctuation pattern table is set in the transfer count counter 203t (S945). The small hit game is set (S946). As the setting of the small hit game, the number of rounds (two rounds in this embodiment), the maximum number of winnings to a specific winning opening (10 in this embodiment), the maximum time for one round (3 in this embodiment) Seconds) etc. are set. The display mode at the time of a small hit (lighting mode of the LED displayed on the first symbol display device 37) is set (S947).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S941 that the during-probability change flag 203l is off (S941: No), if it is determined that the table transfer is not determined in the process of S943 (S943: No), S946. , S947 is executed and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a start winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S110). The start winning process (FIG. 53, S110) in the fifth embodiment is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 20, S110) in the first embodiment in that the process of S604 is changed to S620 and the process of S608 is changed to S630. ing.

In the processing of S620 and S630, in addition to the processing of S604 and S608, processing of acquiring the switching counter CK1 and storing it in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is added. ing. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to switch the fluctuation pattern table by lottery based on the fact that the small winning is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times, every time the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, the lottery for switching the fluctuation pattern tables may be executed, or the fluctuation pattern tables may be switched in a predetermined order.

For example, after the high-probability game state is set, a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected is set up to a predetermined number of times, and thereafter, a fluctuation pattern table with a long fluctuation time is easily selected. It may be set to switch to. By setting in this way, while performing lottery for more special symbols, in a state where the high probability state is low, a variation mode with a high expectation for the jackpot, which is a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, is set. You can enjoy.

On the contrary, after the high-probability game state is set, up to a predetermined number of times, a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected is set, and thereafter, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is easily selected. You may set so that it may switch to a fluctuation pattern table. With this configuration, even if the remaining period of the high-probability state is short, more lots of special symbols can be drawn, and the expectation for a jackpot can be sustained for a longer time. ..

<Correspondence between Description of Embodiment and Description of Claims>
The "first entrance switch or the second entrance switch" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "detection means" described in the claims. The “first symbol or the third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "special game state" described in the claims. The “various normal reach, various super reach, and special reach” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “first dynamic display” described in the claims. "Short deviation, long deviation" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "second dynamic display" described in the claims. The “big hit probability in the low probability state” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first probability” described in the claims. The “high probability jackpot probability in the high probability state” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second probability” described in the claims.

<Modification>
Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment is exchanged, thereby The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values mentioned in the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

For example, in the above-described first embodiment, the time from the state of the probability varying rotor 704 to the state of the “angle A1” to the state of the “angle A2” (a period shorter by 1 second than the “longest period of the probability varying”) is 360 seconds. Although the case has been described, it may be longer or shorter than 360 seconds (for example, 100 seconds, 600 seconds, etc.). Further, the time taken for the probability variable rotating body 704 to change from the “angle A1” state to the “angle A2” state is set to 360 seconds, which is a fixed value. This time is associated with the value of the first type counter C2. You may comprise. For example, 100 seconds may be associated with the value "0-24" of the first hit type counter C2, or 600 seconds may be associated with the value "50-99" of the first hit type counter C2. You may attach it. In this case, when the probability variation generation switch 703 detects entry of a sphere, the probability variation rotator 704 sets the “angle A1” according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 at the time of shifting to the high probability state. The time from the state of 1 to the state of “angle A2” is determined. As a result, the player can be grieved according to the length of the probability change period determined at the start of the probability change. Therefore, the range of game play provided to the player can be expanded.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, in the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated clockwise (every time, the same every 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt processing). The case where the “angle AX” rotation, which is an angle, is described, but it is not necessary to rotate the probability variation rotating body 704 every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times (twice, The probability varying rotator 704 may be rotated each time it is executed (three times or the like). As a result, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case where the probability variable rotating body 704 is rotated every time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Moreover, in the said 1st-4th embodiment, although the definite variation object 700 which has the definite variation rotary body 704 was demonstrated as an accessory which displays the remaining time of a definite variation, the definite variation is the accessory which does not have the probability variation rotation body 704. The remaining time may be displayed. For example, the probability variation role object 700 is a blocking member that blocks a ball, which has been detected by the probability variation generation switch 703, which is the trigger for the probability variation start, of the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707, which is the trigger for the probability variation end. Good. The ball may be retained in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member may be opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied (elapse of a predetermined time, etc.) and guided to the probability change end switch 707.

Further, for example, the probability variation object 700 may be configured by a slope on which a ball rolls, and the probability variation end switch 707 may be provided at the tip of the ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703 and flowing down the slope. It is to be noted that, in the probability variation role object 700, a period in which a ball entering the probability variation generation switch 703 is guided to the probability variation end switch 707 (a period shorter by 1 second than the “maximum probability variation period”) depends on the number of fluctuation effects. Instead, it suffices that the probability variation ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the probability variation started.

Moreover, in the said 1st-5th embodiment, although the probability variation|correction compound 700 which has the probability variation rotation body 704 was demonstrated as a character which displays the remaining time of probability variation, the character itself does not display the remaining time of probability variation. Alternatively, the accessory itself may not be visually recognized by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time of the probability change. When the remaining time of the probability variation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, when the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17) is started, the probability variation start command indicating that the probability variation is started is The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the display control device 114. This probability change start command includes information on the "maximum probability change period". The display control device 114 that has received the probability variation start command determines the remaining time of the probability variation on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the "probability variation longest period" of the probability variation start command and the elapsed time from when the probability variation start command is received. It should be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize the decrease in the remaining time of the probability change.

In addition, in the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the “15R normal jackpot” is won, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and after a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a time saving state. Although the case has been described, the definite odd object 700 may be configured to be in a shortened state for a predetermined time. This makes it possible to end the time saving state not only in the probability variation period but also in the time saving period after the time saving state is started and after a predetermined period elapses.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, the “probability variation longest period” is configured to be double or triple according to the number of balls entering the probability variation generation switch 703. The processing according to the number of balls entered in 703 is not limited to this, and when there are two or more balls entered in the probability variation generation switch 703, for example, before the probability variation starts, Two or more balls may be discharged from the ball discharging unit 706 so that only one ball is present inside the object 700. Specifically, during the 1 second, until the probability variation object entrance counter 203n is set to 1, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves back and forth between the "angle A1" state and the "angle A2" state. It is configured to control the rotating body motor 704a. Further, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which only one ball enters the probability change generation switch 703. Specifically, immediately above the probability change generation switch 703, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked is provided. In the state where the passage of the ball on the route 703a is blocked, a route for guiding the blocked ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. Then, when a ball entering the probability change generation switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 allows the ball on the path 703a to pass through, and then blocks the ball on the path 703a for 10 seconds, for example.

In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the probability variable rotating body 704 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle (by a predetermined angle in a predetermined cycle), but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be smoothly rotated at a predetermined speed. You may comprise. With this configuration, the player can be informed easily that the remaining period of the probability variation period is decreasing.

In addition, in the first to fifth embodiments, if the probability variation rotating body 704 does not rotate by a predetermined angle or more even after the probability variation period elapses for a predetermined period (set maximum period) or more, fraud or malfunction occurs. Although it is configured to forcibly shift from the high-probability state to the normal state, it is not limited to this, and when the probability variation rotating body 704 is controlled to rotate, the probability variation rotating body 704 moves. When an angle is discriminated and a deviation occurs between the control and the actual angle (position), a notification mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an alarm sound is emitted, a signal is output to a hall computer, etc. Unauthorized processing may be executed. Furthermore, the fraud processing may be configured to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state. Alternatively, the high probability state may be temporarily transited to the normal probability state, and control may be performed so as to restore the high probability state when the power is turned on again by the store clerk. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being given to the player even when the probability varying rotating body 740 is structurally bitten and does not rotate, or when the game ball is bitten.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, Display data table is prepared for each element such as, "Variation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and the final display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded in advance from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 expands the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image controller 237 outputs the image information to the frame buffer where the drawn image should be expanded and the third symbol display device 81 every time the image information for one frame is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the display data table defines the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time in correspondence with the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit has been described. The display content is not limited to the above, and any display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since one frame image is displayed every time, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visually recognized by the player when the fluctuation effect is executed has been described. Then, even if all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible level and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Good.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag. Then, the display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, the voice data is read from the voice data storage area 222a, and the reproduced voice is reproduced. It may be set in the data storage area 223d.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning of the first entrance 64, the winning of the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are respectively maximum. Although it is configured to be held up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). .. In addition, in the part of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the prize in the second ball entrance 640 are You may make it display in the form (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) which is different for the number of reserved balls by the number or the area divided into four, and is displayed separately from the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. Alternatively, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided and the number of retained balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variation effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to horizontally scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes a display effect that is displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

Of course, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined.

<Concepts of various inventions>
The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Informs the probability variation period according to the period during which the game ball moves to the end switch)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the win/fail judgment means In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state whose probability of being determined to be higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set Of the normal condition based on the setting condition determining means that determines whether the setting condition that is satisfied after the predetermined period of time is satisfied, and that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. A gaming machine A1 having a state switching setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine A1, the determination is executed by the win/loss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display unit, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. A special state is set by the state setting means on the basis of the satisfaction of a predetermined condition that the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determining means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state. The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, after the predetermined period has elapsed since the privilege game state was set by the state setting means, if the setting condition is satisfied, the state is switched to the normal state, so that the special state can be set at least for the predetermined period. it can. Therefore, the player can at least enjoy the special state for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. A moving unit that moves the first position to the second position while being held by the holding unit, and a second detection that detects the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving unit. Means and the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means sets the second state. A gaming machine A2, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game sphere detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game sphere is held at the first position by the holding means. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the first detecting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Therefore, the period from being held by the holding means to being detected by the second detection means is a period in which the special state is set, and there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine A2, the detected number storage means for storing the number of game balls detected by the first detection means, and the game ball detected by the second detection means for the number stored in the detected number storage means. Update means for subtracting and updating based on, and the state switching setting means detects the game sphere by the second detecting means, and the number stored in the detected number storage means by the updating means is When it is updated to 0, the gaming machine A3 is switched to the special state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls detected by the first detecting means is stored in the detected number storage means. The number stored in the detected number storage means is subtracted based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the second detection means, and is updated by the updating means. When the game ball is detected by the second detection means and the number stored in the detected number storage means is updated by the updating means to become 0, the state switching setting means switches to the special state. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the first detection means, it becomes possible to set a long period in which the special state is set, and the player is made to detect many game balls by the first detection means. You can expect to play a game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A3 has a ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, and a guide means for guiding the game ball entering the ball entrance to the holding means, and the first detection means is the entrance In order to detect a game ball that has entered the ball opening, the holding means has a holding portion capable of holding one game ball, and when the holding portion holds the game ball, A game machine A4, characterized in that, when a game ball enters the ball opening, the entered game ball is stored in the guiding part until it is held in the holding part.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter is guided to the holding means by the guide means. The game ball that has entered the ball entrance is detected by the first detection means. When a game ball is held by the holding part of the holding means and the game ball is held in the holding part, if the game ball enters the ball entrance, the entered game ball is held in the holding part. Until it is stored, it is stored by the guiding part. As a result, the game balls detected by the first detection means can be guided to the holding portion in order. Therefore, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball detected by the first detection means to the holding portion, and it is possible to suppress an inconvenience that impairs the profit of the player.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the dynamic display time determining means determines one dynamic display time from the dynamic display time group set by a plurality of dynamic display times, and the result of the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it is easy to determine a long dynamic display time when it is determined based on the above, and when it is determined that the result of the determination is the determination result indicated by the specific identification information.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, one dynamic display time is determined from the dynamic display time group set by a plurality of dynamic display times by the dynamic display time determination means based on the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means. When it is determined that the hit determination result is the determination result indicated by the specific identification information, the long dynamic display time is easily determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Accordingly, when the identification information is dynamically displayed for a long dynamic display time, the player can be expected to display the specific identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display time and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic B group> (Rotate the rotating accessory only during the period of fluctuation of the design)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/no judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the display time, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the award/failure determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether or not a setting condition is satisfied after a total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed after the state is set, and the setting thereof. A gaming machine B1 having a state switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the condition determining means determining that the setting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B1, the win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, it is determined by the setting condition determination means whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means is satisfied. It The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined time and then set by switching from the special state to the normal state, so that the setting of the special state can be maintained while the player is not playing the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the profit of the player is impaired while the player is not playing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her profits and being less motivated and tired of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. Moving means for moving the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and the moving means for moving the game ball while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. It has movement control means for controlling and second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, and the state setting means has the first detection. The special condition is set on the basis of the game ball being detected by the means, and the setting condition determining means is based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means on the basis of the setting condition. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that it is determined that

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. While the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, the movement control means controls the movement means to move the game ball. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, it is judged by the setting condition judging means that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the special state can be set in the period in which the game ball is moved. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine B2, based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, an acquisition unit that acquires the determination information that is determined by the determination unit and the determination information that is acquired by the acquisition unit are held until the determination condition is satisfied. With a storage means capable of storing as information, the movement control means, when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, if the holding information is stored in the storage means, A gaming machine B3, which controls to continue the movement of the game ball by the moving means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, the acquisition information acquires the determination information which is determined by the determination unit. The determination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored as pending information until the determination condition is satisfied by the storage unit. When the suspension display of the identification information is stopped when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the movement control means controls so that the movement of the game ball by the movement means continues. Therefore, when the hold information is stored, the movement control means controls the movement of the game ball to be continued, so that it is not necessary to perform the processing for stopping the movement means, and the control processing is simplified. There is an effect that can be done.

The gaming machine B4 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, wherein the moving means moves the gaming ball from the first position to the second position at a constant speed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game ball is moved by the moving means at a constant speed from the first position to the second position, so that the special state is set at a certain time. The effect is that it can be easily controlled.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the moving means moves the first position to the second position by a predetermined movement amount at a predetermined cycle. ..

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is moved by the moving means from the first position to the second position at a predetermined moving amount in a predetermined cycle, so that it is special. The effect is that the state can be easily controlled for a certain period of time.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the win/loss determination means executes a win/loss determination based on a probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state set when the determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the win/fail determination is based on the probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state set when the determination condition is satisfied. Since it is executed by the means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by expecting that the determination condition is satisfied during the special state so that the game is played.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, after the special state is set, based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is started on the display means, the total time of the dynamic display time is stored. A game machine B7 having a time storage means, wherein the movement control means controls the movement means in accordance with the total time stored in the time storage means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the total time of the dynamic display time is stored in the time storage means based on the start of the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means after the special state is set. The movement means is controlled by the movement control means according to the total time stored in the time storage means.

Thereby, the moving means can be configured to move the game ball when the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the player takes a break during the special state of the game, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage from occurring.

In the gaming machine B7, the value stored in the time storage means is set to an initial value based on the special state being set by the state switching setting means or the normal state being set. A game machine B8 having an initialization means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the special state is set by the state switching setting means, or the normal state is set, and is stored in the time storage means. Since the value is set to the initial value by the initialization means, there is an effect that the movement control means can easily perform the control when the special state is set.

<Characteristic C group> (Countermeasure against fraud, if abnormal change does not end even after a lapse of a predetermined period, error notification)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the hit/miss determining means In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state whose probability of being determined to be higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set Of the normal condition based on the setting condition determining means that determines whether the setting condition that is satisfied after the predetermined period of time is satisfied, and that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. A state switching setting means for setting, a period determining means for determining the period set in the special state based on the setting of the special state, and a period longer than the predetermined period by the period determining means. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having an abnormality processing unit that determines that the abnormal condition is satisfied when the above condition is satisfied and executes a predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination is executed by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The normal state is set based on the fact that the setting condition is determined by the setting condition determining means. Based on the setting of the special state, the period determining means determines the period set in the special state. When the period determining unit determines that the abnormal condition is satisfied when the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined abnormality process is executed by the abnormality processing unit. This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the game shop.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as a predetermined abnormal process, so by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state, an illegal special There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the state continues.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game held by the holding means. A moving means for moving the ball from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and a moving means for moving the ball to the second position after detecting the moved game ball 2 detecting means, the state setting means is for setting the special state based on the game ball is detected by the first detecting means, the setting condition determining means, A gaming machine C3, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine C3 has a movement amount determination means for determining whether the period determined by the period determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values, and the abnormality processing means moves the movement. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that the predetermined abnormal processing is executed on the basis that the quantity judging means judges that the value is out of the normal value.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3. That is, the movement amount determination means determines whether the period determined by the period determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values. Based on the determination result that the value is out of the normal value, the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be discriminated at an early stage.

<Feature D group> (Prevention of fraud (type that moves only during dynamic display))
On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. By a dynamic display time determining means for determining a display time, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the hit/miss determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed after the state is set, and the setting thereof are set. On the basis that the condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied, the state switching setting means for setting the normal state and the special state are set, and then the identification information is dynamically displayed. On the basis of this, the time discriminating means for discriminating the total time of the dynamic display time in the special state, and the abnormal condition is established when the time discriminating means discriminates that the predetermined time or more has elapsed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having an abnormality processing means for determining that there is an abnormality and executing a predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine D1, the win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the satisfaction of the judgment condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, it is determined by the setting condition determination means whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information by the display means is satisfied. It The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. After the special state is set, the total time of the dynamic display times during the special state is determined by the time determining means based on the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. When it is determined by the time determination means that the predetermined time or more has elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal condition is satisfied, and the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the game shop.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormal processing, so by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state, an illegal special There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the state continues.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game held by the holding means. A moving means for moving the sphere from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and a game sphere moved by the moving means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The movement setting means for controlling the movement means, and the second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, and the state setting means , The special state is set based on the game ball being detected by the first detecting means, and the setting condition determining means is based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means. The game machine D3 is characterized by determining that the setting condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, the movement means is controlled by the movement control means so that the game ball is moved by the movement means. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D3 has a movement amount determination means for determining whether the total time determined by the time determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values, and the abnormality processing means, A gaming machine D4, characterized in that the predetermined abnormal processing is executed on the basis that the movement amount judging means judges that the value is out of the normal value.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the movement amount determination means determines whether the total time determined by the time determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values. Based on the determination result that the result is outside the normal value, the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be discriminated at an early stage.

<Characteristic E group> (Switching table of variable time depending on small hit)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. Dynamic display time determining means for determining time, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display time groups configured by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and storage thereof Group type changing means for changing the dynamic display time group whose dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means based on establishment of a change condition from among the dynamic display time groups stored in the means. And, when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the probability that the hit/damage determination means determines that the hit is a normal state. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state set higher than a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, in the display means after the special state is set by the state setting means. Setting condition determining means for determining whether a setting condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time of the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. On the basis of the fact that the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means has a state switching setting means for setting the normal state, the dynamic display time shorter than other dynamic display time group. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a short dynamic display time group which is set easily is set.

According to the gaming machine E1, the determination is executed by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The identification information indicating the result of the judgment is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A plurality of dynamic display time groups configured by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determination means are stored in the storage means. The dynamic display time group whose dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means is changed by the group type changing means from the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the change condition. To be done. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. After the special state is set by the state setting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied after the total time of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means elapses for a predetermined time. The state switching setting means sets the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. A short dynamic display time group that is set so that the dynamic display time shorter than the other dynamic display time groups is easily determined is set in the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means. Thus, by setting the short dynamic display time group, the identification information can be dynamically displayed many times during the special state, and the game can be efficiently played. Therefore, in a special state, the expectation for a jackpot can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

In the gaming machine E1, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detecting means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means. A moving unit that moves the first position to the second position while being held by the holding unit, and a second detection that detects the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving unit. Means and the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means sets the second state. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detecting means.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means. As a result, the period during which the game ball moves can be the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the group type changing means is configured to be able to select the short dynamic display time group when the changing condition is satisfied when the special state is set. Characteristic gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the special state is set, the short dynamic display time group is selected when the change condition is satisfied by the group type changing means. It is possible to increase the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed during the period when the state is set, and it is possible to efficiently play the game in the special state.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is set to be easily selected by the group type changing means in the special state than in the normal state. A gaming machine E4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is selected by the group type changing means in the special state rather than in the normal state. Since the setting is made easy, there is an effect that the player can expect the short dynamic display time group to be selected when the special state is set so that the player can play the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the group type changing means is predetermined based on that the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after changing to the short dynamic display time group. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being changed to another dynamic display time group.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after being changed to the short dynamic display time group. Since the group type changing means changes the selected dynamic display time group to another dynamic display time group, it is possible to suppress an excessively short dynamic display time from being selected.

<Feature F group> (Modification M)
Detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and based on the detection of the entering of the game ball by the detecting means, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player. At the same time, the control means for performing control based on the lottery result, the dynamic display determination means for determining the dynamic display of the identification information based on the lottery result of the lottery by the control means, and the dynamic display determination means are determined. The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the period corresponding to the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery when the game ball enters To a high probability start area that triggers a second probability that is higher than the first probability, and a start area detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, and the start area detection means for the high probability start area When it is detected that the player has entered the ball, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the second probability, and the high probability starting means, and the high probability starting means wins the special game state in the lottery. After the predetermined probability has been set as the second probability, a high probability end means for setting the first probability to be the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery after a predetermined period, and the dynamic display determination means. Is for determining at least a first dynamic display and a second dynamic display as the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined. The execution period is longer in the first dynamic display than in the second dynamic display, and the first dynamic display is executed in the dynamic display execution means compared to the case where the second dynamic display is executed. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is more likely that the special game state has been won in the lottery when the target display is executed.

According to the gaming machine F1, the control means performs a lottery on whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball entering the specific area by the detecting means. Based on the result of the lottery, the dynamic display determination means determines the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means moves the identification information during the period corresponding to the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display determination means. Execute the static display. The high-probability start means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the second probability when the start area detection means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability start area (high probability state). ). On the other hand, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the second probability by the high-probability starting means, and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability after a predetermined period. Yes (end high probability state). The dynamic display determination means determines at least the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display as the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display has a longer period of execution of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means than the second dynamic display, and there is a high possibility that the special game state is won in the lottery. Thus, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery to the second probability by the high-probability starting means, and then the first probability of the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery after a predetermined period. Therefore, it is highly possible that the special game state is won in the lottery, and even if the first dynamic display is long in which the dynamic display is executed for a long period, the dynamic display period is high. The duration of the stochastic state does not increase. For example, in the high probability state, without transition to the special game state, there is a high probability that the special game state was won in the lottery, and the dynamic display is executed multiple times for a long period of time. If the period of the high-probability state is simply increased, the game becomes monotonous and the player may feel uncomfortable. According to the present invention, the period of the high probability state does not become long due to the period of the dynamic display, so that the discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state can be reduced. .. Then, in the case where the first dynamic display with a high possibility of winning the special game state in the lottery is not executed and the second dynamic display with a low possibility of winning in the special game state in the lottery is executed, the second Since the period in which the dynamic display is executed is shorter than that in the first dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is smaller than that in the case where the first dynamic display is executed. Therefore, the chance of lottery that allows more transitions to the special game state is left. On the other hand, if the first dynamic display that is highly likely to win the special game state in the lottery is executed and the second dynamic display that is unlikely to be won in the special game state is not executed in the lottery, the first dynamic display Since the period for which the display is executed is longer than that for the second dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is smaller than that for the case where the second dynamic display is executed. Therefore, if it is not decided to transit to the special gaming state due to the dynamic fluctuation, the chances of the lottery that can transit to the special gaming state are reduced. As a result, the player's desire to decide to make a transition to the special game state is inevitable in the dynamic display. That is, the enthusiasm for the dynamic display is heightened. Therefore, the degree of reduction in the chance of the lottery that can make a transition to the special game state varies depending on the dynamic display executed in the high-probability state, so that the player can be provided with a new game property. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the game ball, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set as the first probability The area detection means and the high-probability start means set the second probability as the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery, and after a predetermined period of time, the game balls that have entered the high-probability start area are A ball guiding means for guiding to a high-probability end area, and the high-probability end means, in the lottery, when the end area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability end area. A gaming machine F2, wherein the probability of winning a special gaming state is set to the first probability.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. The high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability when the end area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high-probability ending area. The ball guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability start area to the high probability end area after a predetermined period after the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability by the high probability start means. .. As a result, the player can predict the end of the high probability state from the movement of the ball guided by the ball guiding means. In the ball guiding means described in the gaming machine F2, the mode of guiding the game ball entering the high-probability start region to the high-probability end region is not limited to the mode of bringing the game ball close to the high-probability end region. For example, the ball guiding means is a blocking member that blocks the route to the high probability end area, and the game ball is retained in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member is released when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that there is a high probability. It may be a mode of leading to the end region. Further, the ball guiding means may be a slope, and the game ball that has entered the high-probability start area may have a high-probability end area at the point where it flows down the slope. During the period until the ball guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability starting area to the high probability ending area, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high probability starting means is set to the second probability, It need not be related to the number of dynamic displays determined by the static display determination means.

In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high probability start means to the second probability, and then the high probability end means in the special game state in the lottery. In the first period until the probability of being won to the first probability is not changed to the special game state in the first period, the high probability start means wins the special game state in the lottery. A gaming machine configured to guide a game ball entering the high-probability start area to the high-probability end area so that the probability is set to the second probability. F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guiding means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means to the second probability and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability ending means to the first probability. The first period is configured to guide the game ball entering the high-probability start region to the high-probability end region so as to become a predetermined period when the special game state does not transition in the first period. Thereby, regardless of the length of the period in which the dynamic display is executed, the period of the high probability state when the special game state is not transitioned can be made constant. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state.

In the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means retains the gaming ball that has entered the high probability start area by a first stopping means and the gaming ball stopped by the first stopping means. A game machine F4, comprising: a first movement executing means for moving so as to lead to the high probability end area during a period in which the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guiding means, the first stop means for stopping the game ball that has entered the high probability start area, and the game ball stopped by the first stop means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information. During the period of execution, there is provided a first movement executing means for moving to a high probability end region. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is not executed unless the game ball is entered in the specific area, so that the game ball stopped in the first stopping means does not approach the high probability end area. Absent.

For example, due to factors such as a failure of a ball launching device that shoots a game ball on the game board, a game ball being clogged in a nail on the game board, or a nail on the game board being fastened to the specific area, the game is played in the specific area. It is possible that the ball cannot be entered or is difficult. In these cases, when the game ball stopped by the first stopping means approaches the high-probability end area, chances of lottery in the high-probability state decrease, so that the player's profit cannot be secured. According to the present invention, as long as the game ball is not entered in the specific area, the game ball stopped in the first stopping means does not approach the high probability end area, and the chance of lottery in the high probability state is not reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit of the player can be protected.

In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means guides the game ball, which is stopped by the second stopping means, to the high probability end area, and the second stopping means that holds the game ball entering the high probability start area. As described above, when the dynamic display determination means determines the dynamic display of the identification information, the movement amount corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display determination means and the second movement execution means for moving And a gaming machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. The ball guide means is a second display means for stopping the game ball that entered the high probability start area, and a dynamic display determination means for guiding the game ball stopped by the second stop means to the high probability end area. And a second movement executing means for moving the movement amount corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by. Thereby, the player who knows the movement amount of the game ball stopped at the second stop means corresponding to the period of the dynamic display has a high probability end area of the game ball when visually recognizing the dynamic display. You can decide whether to approach. That is, there is an effect that the end of the high probability state can be predicted from the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability by the high-probability start means, and then the special game state is set in the lottery by the high-probability end means. A first period storage means for storing a value representing a period until the probability of winning becomes the first probability, and a probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means as the second probability. It is determined from the first progress storage means that stores a value representing the elapsed time since the completion of the operation, and the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first time duration storage means. A high probability that the first excess judgment means and the probability that the special gaming state is won in the lottery based on the fact that the elapsed time has been exceeded by the first excess judgment means are the first probability. A gaming machine F6, comprising: forced termination means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the following effect is produced. For example, a game ball that has entered the high-probability start area reaches the high-probability end area due to a fraudulent act such as the ball-guide means breaking or being destroyed, or the guide ball of the game ball being blocked by the ball-guide means. If not possible, the high-probability state will not end unless the game ball reaches the high-probability end region, so the high-probability state can be illegally extended. However, according to the present invention, after the first excess determination means determines the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the second probability from the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first period storage means. If it is determined that the elapsed period of is exceeded, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high-probability forced termination means is set to the first probability, and thus it is possible to prevent the high-probability state from being illegally extended. effective.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a judging means for judging whether or not the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is a predetermined gaming state before the second probability, and a predetermined means by the judging means. When it is determined that the game state is in the game state, even if the start area detection unit detects that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is The high probability non-starting means which is not the second probability and the start area detecting means detect that the game ball has entered the high probability starting area, and the high probability non-starting means causes the special game state in the lottery. If the probability of winning is not set to the second probability, the third stop means for stopping the game ball that entered the high probability start area, and the game ball stopped at the third stop means are Third movement executing means for moving the high-probability end area so as to lead to the high-probability end area and the start area detecting means detecting that the game ball has entered the high-probability start area, and then the third movement of the game ball Second period storage means for moving the execution means and storing a value representing a scheduled period until the end area detection means detects a game ball entering the high probability end area, and the start area detection means. By the second progress storage means for storing a value representing the elapsed time after it is detected that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, the value of the second progress storage means and the second period storage means. And a second excess determining means for determining that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period, and the second excess determining means determines that the elapsed period exceeds the scheduled period. A gaming machine F7, comprising: a notifying means for making a predetermined notification based on

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F6, the following effect is produced. When the determination means determines that the predetermined game state before the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is set to the second probability, the high-probability non-starting means determines the high-probability start area by the start area detecting means. Even if it is detected that a game ball has entered, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is not the second probability. In the case of this predetermined game state, the game ball entered in the high probability start area and stopped by the third stop means is guided to the high probability end area by the third movement executing means. When the second excess determination means determines from the second period storage means and the second elapsed storage means that the scheduled period exceeds the elapsed period, the notification means gives a predetermined notification. As a result, if the ball guiding means and the end area detecting means are normal in the predetermined game state, the predetermined notification is not made. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is given, the player or the clerk of the game hall who has visually confirmed the predetermined notification can know that the ball guiding means or the end area detecting means is out of order.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, whether or not the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display based on the fact that the game area has entered the high probability end area by the end area detection means. The dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not, and the dynamic display execution determining means determines that the dynamic display executing means is executing the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is In the case of setting the first probability, the high-probability ending schedule means for setting the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery to the first probability is provided, and the high-probability ending means is the high probability. When the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is scheduled to be the first probability by the probability end schedule means, the special display in the lottery is performed after the dynamic display execution means stops the dynamic display. A gaming machine F8, which is configured so that the probability of winning the gaming state is the first probability.

The gaming machine F8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. For example, when a game ball that has entered the high-probability start area is guided by the ball guiding means and is entered in the high-probability end area immediately before the stop of the dynamic display, the player is There is a concern that the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the first probability or the second probability. According to the present invention, the high-probability-end-scheduling means is determined by the dynamic-display-execution determining means that the dynamic-display executing means is executing the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the first probability. In this case, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is scheduled to be the first probability. When this schedule is made, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the first probability after the dynamic display execution means stops the dynamic display, and thus the player is confused. Even if there is a risk, there is an effect that the player is not confused.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, a third progress storage means for storing a value representing an elapsed period of a period in which the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is the second probability, and the special game in the lottery. When it is decided to transition to the special game state in the lottery while the probability of winning the game state is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means is, the more valuable the player is given to the player. A gaming machine F9, characterized by comprising a valuable value amount determining means for determining a large amount of value.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F8, the following effect is produced. When the value of the valuable value amount determining means determines to transition to the special gaming state in the lottery while the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means is, Decide a large amount of valuable value to give to the player. In other words, the earlier the high probability state is started, the more valuable value is given to the player.

For example, in the gaming machine in which the high probability state is newly started after the special game state when it is decided to transit to the special game state during the high probability state, the player starts the high probability state. It is hoped that the transition to the special game state will be decided at an early stage after the elapsed time. According to the present invention, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the amount of valuable value also increases, so that the player is pleased twice. On the contrary, if it is decided that the transition to the special game state is made at a stage where the elapsed time from the start of the high probability state is late, the player is discouraged because the amount of valuable value is small. On the other hand, since it has been decided that the high-probability state is newly started after the special game state, not only is it discouraged, but a new hope can be found. In this way, in the gaming machine having the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the second probability, the period until the guiding means guides the game ball entering the high probability start region to the high probability end region There is an effect that it can provide a new interest that corresponds to the valuable value. The "period" described in the claims means "time".

<Characteristic G group> (Set the probable variation period by the period until the total value of the points set in the selected variation pattern is reached)
On the basis of the satisfaction of the determination condition, a win/fail judgment means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display means. A dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display mode. A privilege game executing means for executing the above, and a state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being judged to be a hit by the hit determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the gaming machine having the above, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is provided with unique totalable total information for each dynamic display mode, and the dynamic display mode On the basis of the dynamic display mode being determined by the mode determining means, the total information provided to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired and totaled with the total information acquired so far. When the special state is set by the aggregation means and the state setting means, the aggregation determination means that determines the aggregation information that is aggregated by the aggregation means, and the result determined by the aggregation determination means is predetermined. A game machine G1 comprising: a state switching setting means for setting the special state to be switched to the normal state when it is determined that the result is the result.

According to the gaming machine G1, the success/failure determination is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from a plurality of dynamic display modes. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Here, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is provided with unique totalable total information for each dynamic display mode. Based on the fact that the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the totalizing information given to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired by the totalizing means. Then, the totalizing information acquired so far is totaled by the totalizing means. When the special state is set by the state setting means, the totalization information aggregated by the aggregation means is determined by the aggregation determination means. When it is determined that the result determined by the totalizing determination unit is a predetermined result, the state switching setting unit sets the special state to the normal state. As a result, the special state is set until the predetermined result is obtained by the totalizing determination means, so that the player can enjoy the game while predicting the current totaling result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine G1, the aggregate information given to the dynamic display mode is composed of numerical information, and the aggregate discriminating means discriminates whether the total value of the numerical information is equal to or more than a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode from a plurality of different dynamic display modes based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means. Greater numerical value information is provided in the dynamic display mode that is easily determined by the dynamic display mode determination means when the win/fail judgment result of the win/loss determination means is the judgment result to be displayed in the specific identification information. A gaming machine G2, which is provided as the total information.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the total information given to the dynamic display mode is composed of numerical information. The totalization determination unit determines whether the total value of the numerical information is equal to or more than a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from among a plurality of different dynamic display modes by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the win/fail judgment result of the win/fail determination means. In the dynamic display mode that is easy to be determined when the win/no judgment result of the win/no judgment unit by the dynamic display mode determination unit is a judgment result that is displayed with specific identification information, larger numerical information is used as the aggregated information. Has been granted. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode in which the result of the hit determination is set to be easily displayed with the specific identification information is selected, a large numerical value information is set, so that it is special according to the expectation to the jackpot of the player. The effect is that the remaining period of the state can be set to be reduced.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the counting means starts counting based on the special state being set by the state setting means, and the special state or the normal state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine G3 having an initialization means for initializing the information aggregated by the aggregation means based on the setting.

The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, based on the special state being set by the state setting means, the tallying means starts the tallying. The information aggregated by the aggregation unit is initialized by the initialization unit based on the setting of the special state or the normal state by the state setting unit. As a result, when the special state is started, the counting can be started from the initialized state. Therefore, there is an effect that the special state can be set every time from the start of the special state to the predetermined aggregation result.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, and G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variable effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the starting entrance (starting entrance) (start winning), and for example, three in the effective display area horizontally or vertically, or in a 3×3 square. A total of 9 symbols and the like are displayed, and the symbols and the like displayed based on a predetermined game condition are scrolled, and when the scroll is stopped, a stop symbol becomes a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a big hit when you are there.
In addition, during scrolling of symbols and the like, an entertaining effect (for example, an effect by reach display) that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit) is sometimes performed, which is advantageous. It is also devised to give the player a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, in the production by the reach display, not only is it suggested that the jackpot will be a big hit, but whether or not the probability of being a big jackpot becomes a high probability (high probability state) after the jackpot due to the stop pattern when the scroll is stopped. There is also a gaming machine that produces a performance that makes you expect.
Regarding the high-probability state (probability variation), there is also a gaming machine in which the high-probability state is maintained after the high-probability state is started until the next jackpot is determined (so-called loop-type probability variation machine). In this loop type probability variation machine, since the next big hit is guaranteed in the high probability state, the game in the high probability state can be a monotonous work until the next big hit. In the high probability state, if the variation effect is repeated for a long period of time and the next big hit is not achieved, the player will repeat the monotonous work, and there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable.
On the other hand, from the start of the high-probability state, the high-probability state is maintained until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are finished, and after the jackpot, the high-probability state is maintained again until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are finished. There is also a machine (so-called special time machine (ST machine)).
In this ST machine, the longest period from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability variation longest period”) is until the predetermined number of fluctuation effects are completed. .. As a result, the ST machine is not guaranteed the next big hit in the high-probability state, so the player wants to continue the high-probability state executed after the big hit by making another big hit during this high-probability state. It is possible to suppress the discomfort given to the player due to the monotonous work of the high probability game.
Further, the ST machine gives a high probability state of the "probability variation longest period" again by making a big hit until the predetermined number of variation effects which are the "probability variation longest period" are executed. In other words, whether or not the jackpot can be repeated within a short period of time, which is the "maximum probability variation period," is an advantage of the ST machine that increases the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). No. 272159).
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by setting a finite probability variation period, but with such a configuration, there is an illegal act that attempts to set the probability variation period for an unreasonably long period. There was a problem that it was done.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing damage due to fraud.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a win/fail judgment means for performing a judgment based on the satisfaction of a judgment condition, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail judgment result by the win/fail judgment means. And a dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means A privilege game executing means for executing a game, and a state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being hit by the hit/miss determining means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a setting condition determining unit that determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the special state is set, and the setting condition determining unit that determines the setting condition. State switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the fact that the special state is established, and period determination for determining the period set in the special state based on the setting of the special state. And an abnormality processing unit that determines that an abnormal condition is satisfied when the period determination unit determines that the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period has elapsed and executes a predetermined abnormality process. ..
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in which the first detecting means capable of detecting the game ball and the game ball detected by the first detecting means can be held at the first position. Holding means, moving means for moving the game ball held by the holding means from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and after being moved to the second position by the moving means In the second detecting means for detecting the moved game ball, the state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the game ball being detected by the second detecting means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination is executed by the hit/miss determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The state setting means sets a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than the predetermined probability of being the normal state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.
The setting condition determining means determines whether or not a setting condition that holds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state was set. The normal state is set based on the fact that the setting condition is determined by the setting condition determining means. Based on the setting of the special state, the period determining means determines the period set in the special state. When the period determining means determines that the period equal to or longer than the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal condition is satisfied, and the predetermined abnormal process is executed by the abnormal process means.
This can prevent the special state from being set for an excessively long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that impairs the profit of the gaming shop. Therefore, there is an effect that damage due to fraud can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormality processing, so that the normal state is changed to the normal state. By forcibly switching to the state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the special state continues illegally.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect obtained by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means.
The special state is set by the state setting means based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied.
Thereby, the period during which the game ball moves can be set as the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (a part of display means)
Part of S 103 privilege game execution means
S 306 Part of special state setting means
S 901 portion of the decision means between some S908 dynamic display period determining means

Claims (3)

Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a determination means for executing the determination,
Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means;
A dynamic display time determining means for determining a dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means,
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means,
In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the hit/miss determination means is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Setting condition determining means for determining whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the special state is set,
State switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the setting condition determining means determining that the setting condition is satisfied;
Based on that the special state has been set, a period determination means for determining the period set in the special state,
When it is determined by the period determination means that the period of time equal to or longer than the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that an abnormal condition is satisfied, and an abnormality processing unit that executes a predetermined abnormality process is included. And the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing. First detection means capable of detecting a game ball,
Holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detecting means at the first position,
Moving means for moving the game ball held by the holding means from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means,
And a second detecting means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving means,
The state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detecting means,
The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means. ..

Images